Books - Science - Technology

1-20 of 100       1   2   3   4   5   Next 20

  • Technology
  • click price to see details     click image to enlarge     click link to go to the store

    $20.71
    1. Cooking for Geeks: Real Science,
    $17.79
    2. Where Good Ideas Come From: The
    $15.00
    3. Aftershock: The Next Economy and
    $10.17
    4. Oh, Yuck! The Encyclopedia of
    $15.37
    5. The Master Switch: The Rise and
    6. The Future of Learning Institutions
    $3.53
    7. Hot, Flat, and Crowded: Why We
    $16.19
    8. The Rational Optimist: How Prosperity
    $10.88
    9. The World Is Flat 3.0: A Brief
    $16.31
    10. What Technology Wants
    11. Living and Learning with New Media:
    12. Confronting the Challenges of
    $12.01
    13. The Path Between the Seas: The
    $6.16
    14. The Art of War
    $16.33
    15. The Next Decade: Where We've Been
    $10.85
    16. The Next 100 Years: A Forecast
    $17.13
    17. The Poisoner's Handbook: Murder
    18. Young People, Ethics, and the
    $16.47
    19. You Are Not a Gadget: A Manifesto
    $10.35
    20. The Post-American World

    1. Cooking for Geeks: Real Science, Great Hacks, and Good Food
    by Jeff Potter
    Paperback
    list price: $34.99 -- our price: $20.71
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0596805888
    Publisher: O'Reilly Media
    Sales Rank: 118
    Average Customer Review: 4.6 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    Are you the innovative type, the cook who marches to a different drummer -- used to expressing your creativity instead of just following recipes? Are you interested in the science behind what happens to food while it's cooking? Do you want to learn what makes a recipe work so you can improvise and create your own unique dish?

    More than just a cookbook, Cooking for Geeks applies your curiosity to discovery, inspiration, and invention in the kitchen. Why is medium-rare steak so popular? Why do we bake some things at 350 F/175 C and others at 375 F/190 C? And how quickly does a pizza cook if we overclock an oven to 1,000 F/540 C? Author and cooking geek Jeff Potter provides the answers and offers a unique take on recipes -- from the sweet (a "mean" chocolate chip cookie) to the savory (duck confit sugo).

    This book is an excellent and intriguing resource for anyone who wants to experiment with cooking, even if you don't consider yourself a geek.

    • Initialize your kitchen and calibrate your tools
    • Learn about the important reactions in cooking, such as protein denaturation, Maillard reactions, and caramelization, and how they impact the foods we cook
    • Play with your food using hydrocolloids and sous vide cooking
    • Gain firsthand insights from interviews with researchers, food scientists, knife experts, chefs, writers, and more, including author Harold McGee, TV personality Adam Savage, chemist Hervé This, and xkcd


    From Cooking for Geeks: Butternut Squash Soup

    Purée in a food processor or with an immersion blender:
    2 cups (660g) butternut squash, peeled, cubed, and roasted (about 1 mediumsquash)
    2 cups (470g) chicken, turkey, or vegetable stock
    1 small (130g) yellow onion, diced and sautéed
    1/2 teaspoon (1g) salt (adjust to taste)

    Notes

    • The weights are for the prepared ingredients and only rough suggestions. So, prepare each item individually. For example, for the squash, peel it, then coat it with olive oil, sprinkle it with salt, and roast it in the oven at a temperature around 400–425 F / 200–220 C until it begins to brown. When you go to purée the ingredients, hold back some of the squash and some of the stock, taste the purée, and see which you think it needs. Want it thicker? Add more squash.Thinner? Add more stock.
    • This soup by itself is very basic. Garnish with whatever else you have on hand that you think might go well, such as garlic croutons and bacon. Or top with a small dab of cream, some toasted walnuts, and dried cranberries to give it a feeling of Thanksgiving. How about a teaspoon of maple syrup, a few thin slices of beef, and some fresh oregano? Chives, sour cream, and cheddar cheese? Why not! Instead of purchasing items to follow a recipe exactly, try using leftover ingredients from other meals to complement the squash soup.
    • If you’re in a rush, you can “jump-start” the squash by microwaving it first. Peel and quarter the squash, using a spoon to scoop out the seeds. Then, cube it into 1–2” / 3–5 cm pieces, drop it into a glass baking pan that’s both oven and microwave safe, and nuke it for four to five minutes to partially heat the mass. Remove from microwave, coat the squash with olive oil and a light sprinkling of salt, and roast it in a preheated oven until done, about 20 to 30 minutes. If you’re not in a rush, you can skip the peeling step entirely: cut the squash in half, scoop out the seeds, add oil and salt, roast it for about an hour (until the flesh is soft), and use a spoon to scoop it out.

    Pumpkin Cake

    There are two broad types of cake batters: high- ratio cakes--those that have more sugar and water than flour (or by some definitions, just a lot of sugar)--and low-ratio cakes—which tend to have coarser crumbs. For high-ratio cakes, there should be more sugar than flour (by weight) and more eggs than fats (again, by weight), and the liquid mass (eggs, milk, water) should be heavier than the sugar.

    Consider this pumpkin cake, which is a high-ratio cake (245g of pumpkin contains 220g of water--you can look these sorts of things up in the USDA National Nutrient Database, available online at http://www.nal.usda.gov/fnic/foodcomp/search/).

    In a mixing bowl, measure out and then mix with an electric mixer to thoroughly combine:
    1 cup (245g) pumpkin (canned, or roast and puree your own)
    1 cup (200g) sugar
    3/4 cup (160g) canola oil
    2 large (120g) eggs
    1 1/2 cups (180g) flour
    1/4 cup (40g) raisins
    2 teaspoons (5g) cinnamon
    1 teaspoon (5g) baking powder
    1/2 teaspoon (5g) baking soda
    1/2 teaspoon (3g) salt
    1/2 teaspoon (2g) vanilla extract

    Transfer to a greased cake pan or spring form and bake in an oven preheated to 350 F / 175 C until a toothpick comes out dry, about 20 minutes.

    Notes

    • Try adding dried pears soaked in brandy. You can also hold back some of the raisins and sprinkle them on top.
    • One nice thing about high-ratio cakes is that they don’t have much gluten, so they won’t turn out like bread, even with excessive beating. With a total weight of 920 grams, of which only roughly 20 grams is gluten, there just isn’t enough gluten present in this cake to give it a bread-like texture. There’s also a fair amount of both sugar and fats to interfere with gluten development.
    • ... Read more

      Reviews

      5-0 out of 5 stars Explains the scientific how and why of cooking, September 9, 2010


      You've got to have a lot of confidence and nerve to write and try to sell a nearly 400 page book on cooking to the take-out pizza and cola set. No cookbook is likely to turn many geeks into chefs or take them away from their computer screens. However, even though "Cooking for Geeks" contains a large number of recipes, it is not a conventional cookbook but a scientific explanation of the how and why of cooking which will certainly appeal to that group, as well as to cooking professionals and intellectually curious others.

      The author is a geek himself and brings "geek-like" approaches to the subject matter - deep intellectual curiosity, affinity for details, appreciation of problem solving and hacking, scientific method, and a love of technology. What is even better is his filtering of cooking concepts by a computer coder's framework, analogizing recipes to executable code, viewing of ingredients as inputs and as variables, running processes over and over in a logical manner to test and improve outcomes. This is not a mere literary shoe-horning of cooking concepts into a coder's framework but an ingenuous approach to the topics that should loudly resonate with geeks.

      The subject matter includes selecting and using kitchen and cooking hardware; prepping inventory; calibrating equipment (especially your oven, using sugar); understanding tastes and smells; the fundamental difference between cooking and baking (and the personality types which gravitate to one form or the other); the importance of gluten and the three major types of leavening (biological, chemical, and mechanical); the types of cooking; using time and temperatures; how to use air as a tool; the chemistry of food combinations; and very thorough and detailed discussions of food handling and safety. The book is organized into seven chapters and includes an appendix dealing with cooking for people with allergies. The recipes are indexed in the front of the book.

      The major conventional flavor types of salt, sugar, acids, and alcohol have been supplemented by modern industrial elements - E- Numbered (a Dewey decimal system-like index) additives, colloids, gels, foams, and other yummy things! All are itemized, charted, and explained in the chapter entitled "Playing with Chemistry." A whole chapter (and an interview with mathematician, Douglas Baldwin) is devoted to the latest and greatest food preparation technique -sous vide- cooking food in a temperature-controlled water bath.

      Threaded through the sections are short sidebar interviews of mostly computer and techie types who are serious cooks or involved in the food industry. Some of these contributors are Adam Savage (of Myth Busters fame) on scientific technique, Tim O'Reilly (CEO of the book's publisher) on scones and jam, Nathan Myhrvold, on Moderist cuisine, and others. Other interviews deal with taste sensitivities, food mysteries, industrial hardware, pastry chef insights, and many more. There is an insightful section just on knives and how to use and care for them.

      Anyone who is interested in cooking will learn from this book. I now pay attention to things I've never heard of before: browning methods like caramelization and the Maillard processes, savory as a major taste, transglutaminase (a.k.a. meat glue), for example. There is stuff I didn't really want to know - "if you've eaten fish you've eaten worms."

      Although one of the strengths of the book is the systematic organization, there are useful tips spread throughout. For example, keeping a pizza stone permanently in your oven will help even out heat distribution; storing vegetables correctly requires knowing whether they admit ethylene gas or not (a chart is included); you can test your smell sensitivity profile by using a professional scratch and sniff test kit obtainable from the University of Pennsylvania. Whatever specialized information not contained in the book is referenced to external sources, especially on the Internet.

      If all of this is not stimulus enough for the geek crowd, how about learning how you can spectacularly kill yourself cooking with dry ice, liquid nitrogen, blowtorches, and especially an electrocuted hotdog. Cool! This is mad scientist stuff. Engineering-minded types can learn how to make their own ice cream machine from Legos. You'll also learn how NOT to kill your guests with bacteria and other toxins.

      The production is nicely done with easily readable text, plentiful drawings and charts, color captions, and many other quality production features. Weights are based in both grams and US volume-based measurements.

      (FTC disclosure (16 CFR Part 255): The reviewer has accepted a reviewer's copy of this book which is his to keep. He intends to provide an honest, independent, and fair evaluation of the book in all circumstances.)

      5-0 out of 5 stars Alton Brown Fans Take Note--You Need This!, August 6, 2010
      Alton Brown fans take note! You need a copy of Cooking for Geeks: Real Science, Great Hacks and Good Food. Seriously, this book takes everything I enjoy about Alton's shows and combines them into a book for the beginner, novice and pro alike.

      Sure some recipes may seem basic. Extremely basic actually. It may seem weird to some that there are people who cannot even scramble an egg, but I've learned from experience that these people do exist. When my neighbor came flying out her house with a smoking pan, it had simply contained olive oil and water for boiling pasta but she'd turned on her stove and forgotten all about it. It became apparent that people can even burn water if given the opportunity.

      Everything you need to know about cooking is in this book. From kitchen set-up and equipment to simple tips like reading a recipe completely before getting started, Cooking for Geeks has everything you need to start preparing home-cooked meals.

      The book offers more than 400 pages of tips, recipes and even interviews with geeks of today. I loved reading Mythbuster's Adam Savage share his love of science and cooking. Learn easy recipes like a 30-Second Chocolate Cake or ones that may seem a little tougher like Butterflied Chicken. By the time you're done, you'll understand that kitchen and be able to whip together nutritious meals for yourself and others.

      It's a very rare event that I come across a review book that I feel I must rush out and purchase a copy as soon as it is released. This is one of those situations. I can't imagine NOT owning this cookbook and I love to cook and know more than the basics already. With outstanding recipes, entertaining interviews and witty writing, this is definitely a book you should hand your friends, family and especially neighbors who do come running out of their home with flaming pans.

      5-0 out of 5 stars Goes Ways Beyond a Collection of Recipes, August 5, 2010
      This isn't your ordinary cookbook. Sure, there are recipes--good ones, too--but the author presents a wealth of information about the science of cooking, cooking techniques, and even the psychology of cooking. It's not so technical that you need a degree in chemistry to understand it. Instead, the author explains things like how human taste senses work in plain terms. There's also a bit on nutrition towards the beginning, and there are charts and tables now and then to illustrate the mechanics of food and cooking throughout.

      If you're an "innovative cook" (see the interview with Brian Wansink, p. 7), this is right up your alley. Potter gives lots of hacks. Usually, cookbooks are very prescriptive and give exact measurements and ways of doing things. Here, the author encourages us to improvise, and he even gives great tips how to do so. For example, did you know you can roast peppers in a toaster?

      I have dozens of cookbooks and love to cook. Cooking For Geeks has surpassed them all and is now my favorite one. Check it out yourself. Well worth the money.

      5-0 out of 5 stars Takes you beyond the "what" into the "how" and "why"... great stuff!, August 14, 2010
      The typical geek doesn't just want something to work. They want to know *why* and *how* it works. If your geekness extends to the kitchen, this book is perfect... Cooking for Geeks: Real Science, Great Hacks, and Good Food by Jeff Potter. It's a wonderful mix of science and hands-on activities, and definitely opened my eyes as to why things work as they do in the kitchen.

      Contents:
      Hello, Kitchen!: Think Like a Hacker; Cooking for One; Cooking for Others
      Initializing the Kitchen: Approaching the Kitchen; Kitchen Equipment; Kitchen Organization
      Choosing Your Inputs - Flavors and Ingredients: Smell + Taste = Flavor; Tastes - Bitter, Salty, Sweet, Umami, Others; Adapt and Experiment Method; Regional/Traditional Method; Seasonal Method; Analytical Method
      Time and Temperature - Cooking's Primary Variables: Cooked = Time * Temperature; Foodborne Illness and Staying Safe; Key Temperatures in Cooking
      Air - Baking's Key Variable: Gluten; Biological Leaveners; Chemical Leaveners; Mechanical Leaveners
      Playing with Chemicals: Traditional Cooking Chemicals; Modern Industrial Chemicals
      Fun with Hardware: Sous Vide Cooking; Commercial Hardware and Techniques
      Appendix; Afterword; Index

      There's just so fun stuff here, it's hard to know where to start. Potter does an excellent job in explaining the science behind what happens when you mix the eggs, flour, and milk together and apply heat. While most books on cooking tell you *what* to do, this one goes into the *why* and *how*. For instance, why does heat change food, and how does that happen? What is involved in protein denaturation, the maillard reaction, and caramelization? And why does knowing all this make a difference to you when it comes to knowing when a particular item is "done cooking"? It's this type of information that takes you beyond saying "but I left it in for the 10 minutes they said... why wasn't it cooked?" After reading Cooking for Geeks, you can start to understand what's going on within the food, and make educated decisions about what happened, what is happening, and what will happen next.

      Fortunately, Cooking for Geeks isn't just a chemistry manual though. It's full of actual recipes that look delicious, as well as interviews with other cooks who reveal some of their secrets and mindsets behind what they do in the kitchen. Again, it all serves to take you beyond the "follow steps 1, 2, and 3" method of cooking, into something that is creative and fun.

      This is like reading a season's worth of Alton Brown's Good Eats shows. Plenty of fun and very informational... and you can eat or toss your mistakes. :)

      Disclosure:
      Obtained From: Publisher
      Payment: Free

      4-0 out of 5 stars A new way to look at cooking and science!, September 6, 2010
      Cooking for Geeks, by Jeff Potter, published by O'Reilly Media

      Cooking for Geeks by Jeff Potter is the cookbook for people who pestered their parents with "why" questions and were never content with the universal answer of the exasperated, "because I said so."

      Cooking for Geeks offers an in-depth look at the science of food, and provides detailed and well researched answers to many questions: Why is it better to weigh, rather than measure, your ingredients? (Weighing is more accurate.) Why is commercial baking powder better than the common tightwad substitute of 2 parts cream of tartar to 1 part baking soda? (Because the commercial kind typically uses multiple types of acid, allowing the CO 2 to release over time, rather than all at once.) How do you create a super hot pizza oven in your own home? (According to Jeff Varasano, C++ programmer turned Atlanta pizzeria owner, clip the lock and bake pizza during the oven's cleaning cycle.)

      Cooking for Geeks also include interesting interviews with well-known geeks who answer even more questions--Adam Savage, of Mythbusters, discusses how they test myths on TV, and how the same principle (change one variable at a time!) can be applied to cooking, while Adam Ried, of America's Test Kitchen and The Boston Globe, talks about developing new recipes by making charts comparing the ingredients and methods in 40 or more existing recipes for the dish he wants to cook.

      Offering 30 pages on kitchen equipment and organization, Cooking for Geeks seems to assume that geeks are novice cooks. The recipes, however, are often lacking in sufficient detail to be successfully prepared, even by an experienced cook. For example, the "Rosemary Mashed Potatoes" recipe on page 201 offers a novel method of preparing potatoes for mash: by microwaving them. Potter explains why this works, but neglects a couple of key points: what are the properties of a microwaved potato when it is ready to mash? And, is it necessary to pierce or cut the potato before cooking? (We ordinarily would poke a potato before cooking it, but since it wasn't mentioned in a book that seems geared to unexperienced cooks, we didn't want to assume. We thought perhaps piercing the potato allow too much moisture to escape, leaving the potato starch unable to expand. But also wondered if the unpierced potato would explode.) In keeping with the theme of the book, and, honestly, hoping to witness an explosion, we designed our own experiment: three batches of potatoes, one pierced; one un-pierced, and a control batch boiled the old fashioned way. We found that the un-pierced potatoes didn't explode. We hypothesized that this was because the recipe called for red potatoes with thin skins, not russets with heavier skin. Further, the unpierced potatoes didn't cook as thoroughly as the pierced potatoes. After 6 minutes, both were soft enough that we could poke them with a fork (the common test for doneness of a potato) but the unpierced ones had hard spots throughout. They were difficult to mash and left crunchy bits throughout. The pierced potatoes cooked through, resulting in coarse and chunky mashed potatoes. The boiled potatoes control group lost less than one-half the water of the pierced group and one-fourth the water of the non-pierced group. We should have adjusted the amount of sour cream and milk, for they had an almost oatmeal-like consistency.

      Cooking for Geeks made acids and bases far more entertaining than our Chemistry textbook ever did, helped us understand what people mean when they say they "need an E-numbers fix" and introduced us to Doug Powell's amusing food safety site: [...]. We copied the lists of flavors used in various ethnic foods and the chart of substitutions for foods that commonly cause allergies to keep in the kitchen for easy reference and inspiration. Cooking For Geeks offered us a method to explore many of the questions we've had about food and cooking. Yes, we wish the recipes were more detailed. No we don't plan to use liquid nitrogen the next time we make ice cream or to flash-pickle cucumbers with a vacuum sealer. Even so, we appreciated and enjoyed this book--it's a far more entertaining introduction to science than anything we read during our K-12 years.

      4-0 out of 5 stars The Z-axis of cooking, September 6, 2010
      This book was designed for me. I've never been comfortable in the kitchen and I haven't been a fan of cooking, as I just don't "get it" and always fear I might ruin other people's meals botching the cook job. I've tried cookbooks, or getting recipes online, but just following directions rote is tedious and boring and I still feel like I might screw it up.

      This book really goes into the how and why of Cooking. I'm learning things like how temperatures and seasons can effect the quality, consistency, and nutrition of foods. It's like learning the legos of cooking, the building blocks, and the recipes are examples of the types of things you can make. But once you understand the blocks, you start to see how you can re-assemble them in new, exciting ways, and its ok to experiment.

      There are also great inteviews with cooks and twitter/internet celebrities. The latter is kind of an interesting choice; Some of them work, others don't, but it's like the author experimented with the traditional recipe for a book, so I still dig it.

      My only real complaint is with the table of contents. I'm reading the ePub version in iBooks on an iPad. I don't know if it's the publisher, the technology, or a combination of both, but the TOC links don't line up with the correct pages. As I read, I have insights and/or get excited about a topic and want to jump to other sections of the book to see the recipes, but the links are quite a few pages off in some cases. The book also tells me there are 929 pages, which I don't think is the case, but if true, I guess that makes it the cryptonomicon of cookbooks. So there is much page flipping, but all in all, a great, useful read!

      5-0 out of 5 stars The Why of Cooking, August 15, 2010
      Cooking is chemistry. With maybe a little physics thrown in on the side. You know, temperature control, stuff like that.

      You may think you don't like to cook. Too boring, too restrictive, you have to follow the recipe - or else. If so, this book is for you. It answer questions that most cook books don't think about asking. And if you have any curiosity about why recipes turn out like they do, and are interested in experimenting, using a knowledge of chemistry and physics to improve your dishes, this is a great book. It includes interviews with fellow geeks who explain why and how they prepare favorite dishes, including one with the publisher, Tim O'Reilly. Each interview adds something to the final mix.

      Although there is some organization to the book, like most cook books, it can be opened to any page, and you'll likely find something interesting to peruse. It is not put together as a textbook on cooking, more as a smorgasbord. Some of the more basic elements of cooking are covered in the early chapters, but the science is available in side bars and short essays throughout the book.

      Other reviews have listed the books table of contents, I won't repeat them. Suffice it to say, if you enjoy experimenting, using the scientific method in your cooking, if your curiosity isn't satisfied by just following a recipe time after time, if you like to know the "why" as well as "how," you'll enjoy this book. Would also make a great gift for that nerdy son/daughter newly living on their own. Highly recommended.

      5-0 out of 5 stars Great cookbook from an unlikely source!, August 9, 2010
      To tell you the truth, I was a little hesitant about a cookbook coming from O'Reilly Media. They produce design and programming books like Tapworthy: Designing Great iPhone Apps and HTML5: Up and Running, not culinary books...or so I thought...

      While waiting for the book release, I checked out Jeff Potter's videos on Facebook and on the O'Reilly site. From there I was hooked. This book, just like the title says, is designed by a geek for geeks (and non-geeks). This book is all about getting hands on with your "software" and "hardware" in your "lab" :) Jeff Potter did a great job in making easy for cooks of all levels to get started. My girlfriend, who claims she's a novice, enjoyed reading cover to cover. Someday I'll read it cover to cover myself, but I'm having too much fun learning about the science of cooking a la carte.

      The cool recipes I keep experimenting with are the timeless "shock & awe eggs" and the 30-Second Chocolate Cake:)
      Awesome job Jeff and O'Reilly to get everyone I know reinvigorated with cooking! Highly recommended for geeks, non-geeks, foodies and novices alike!

      5-0 out of 5 stars Don't be afraid to burn your dinner!, September 7, 2010
      Reading this book is like listening to an old friend who has taken an interest in cooking and is trying to convey his knowledge to you, his good old friend, because he has learned some best practices he would like to share. It's an interesting journey about temperatures, melting points, chemical reactions and what not, it's all in there. One of the main lessons is; "Have fun! Learning is about curiosity, not work," which should not only appeal to us geeks, but to people, eager to learn, in general. Another great lesson "Don't be afraid to burn your dinner!"... In our daily routine, don't be afraid to make mistakes! That's the only way you'll learn what NOT to do. Life lessons.

      Cooking is all about time and temperature, chemistry and flavor, smelling and tasting and you can experiment right in your own kitchen. Sometimes the result of the experiment is even edible, now isn't that cool! In what other cooking book can you read sentences like this: "buttermilk has a pH of 4.4-4.8, while regular milk has a pH of ~6.7, so it follows that baking soda will buffer and neutralize the more acidic buttermilk," not in my moms!

      The book is littered with jokes and references to our geeky-jobs, like RTFR (last R being the "recipe", you know the other letters in this acronym ;-) Or making 'subclasses' of a sauce, and trying various 'instances'... You know exactly where to place these kind of sentences. Brilliant stuff! Apart from that this book is very complete. It covers setting up your kitchen and tools, talks about the various flavors and to smell and taste food, has great interviews with people with various types of relation to cooking or food and is packed with great recipes and ideas. I bet not only geeks have found its contents invaluable and a must read for everyone who regularly has to turn on the stove or oven!

      Great job to Jeff and his team! I wonder what other subjects he and the team could geekify! These could turn out to be much more interesting than the "For Dummies" books!

      P.S. One thing I haven't found yet in the book... How to best clean my burned pan!

      5-0 out of 5 stars Excercises in creativity AND molecular gastronomy!, September 6, 2010
      Sometimes I forgot I was reading a cook book. Cooking for Geeks reminds me of other books I've read and they're mostly craft books. Lots of info about the craft, short but inspirational interviews with people who have done amazing things, and projects that are as much about the process as they are the finished object. The book is already being compared to Alton Brown and it's definitely a must read for AB's fans but it's also for people who want to play with food, experiment, and learn by doing.

      I love Jeff Potter's attitude about cooking. Especially about failure. You will make things that will turn out poorly so stop worrying and start learning. I've messed up plenty of dishes but it's rare that I can't salvage it in some way and this is one of the few cook books I've seen that encourage that kind of thinking. Most will just suggest a few alternative ingredients instead of leading toward thinking up entirely new applications.

      The recipes are more examples of things explored earlier. This isn't a staple cookbook in terms of recipes but it would be very, very good for a beginning cook to have this (as well as anyone else interested in cooking). Concepts, philosophies, and, yes, science are all explored and then demonstrated with recipes. Many recipes have alternate serving suggestions as well.

      The section on molecular gastronomy is very cool. I thought I'd never get to do much of that kind of thing since the ingredients and equipment are expensive and it looks rather difficult for a regular home cook. I was wrong! There are plenty of things the home cook can do without breaking the bank. Granted, I now have more agar flakes than I really need but I can give them to friends who want to make panna cotta pie. It'll be like that Amish friend bread recipe only with strange ingredients and probably more taste. And more calories. ... Read more


    2. Where Good Ideas Come From: The Natural History of Innovation
    by Steven Johnson
    Hardcover (2010-10-05)
    list price: $26.95 -- our price: $17.79
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 1594487715
    Publisher: Riverhead Hardcover
    Sales Rank: 645
    Average Customer Review: 4.2 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    One of our most innovative, popular thinkers takes on-in exhilarating style-one of our key questions: Where do good ideas come from?

    With Where Good Ideas Come From, Steven Johnson pairs the insight of his bestselling Everything Bad Is Good for You and the dazzling erudition of The Ghost Map and The Invention of Air to address an urgent and universal question: What sparks the flash of brilliance? How does groundbreaking innovation happen? Answering in his infectious, culturally omnivorous style, using his fluency in fields from neurobiology to popular culture, Johnson provides the complete, exciting, and encouraging story of how we generate the ideas that push our careers, our lives, our society, and our culture forward.

    Beginning with Charles Darwin's first encounter with the teeming ecosystem of the coral reef and drawing connections to the intellectual hyperproductivity of modern megacities and to the instant success of YouTube, Johnson shows us that the question we need to ask is, What kind of environment fosters the development of good ideas? His answers are never less than revelatory, convincing, and inspiring as Johnson identifies the seven key principles to the genesis of such ideas, and traces them across time and disciplines.

    Most exhilarating is Johnson's conclusion that with today's tools and environment, radical innovation is extraordinarily accessible to those who know how to cultivate it. Where Good Ideas Come From is essential reading for anyone who wants to know how to come up with tomorrow's great ideas.
    ... Read more

    Reviews

    5-0 out of 5 stars A staggering insight into cultivating creativity
    In my years as a Wall Street strategy advisor and as a life-long student of that which propels us towards our greatest potential, I am fascinated by an interesting structural tension when it comes to personal and professional excellence.

    We have at our finger tips, some of the greatest knowledge, tools and processes that can help propel people and organizations towards excellence and yet despite this vast wealth of information, many people (and the organizations they are associated with) struggle.

    After exploring many theories over the years, I think I just realized why this is the case and I am staggered by the implications.

    I have just finished reading "Where Good Ideas Come From" by Steven Johnson (author of "Everything Good is Bad For You" and "The Invention of Air") and found the ideas contained within to be of staggering profundity.

    A Different View on Creativity

    With no offence intended towards well-intentioned individuals within organizations who come up with interesting ways to help us be more creative, I have often struggled with the value of some of the ideas they have come up with. Some examples come to mind, including the time I flew across the country for a mandatory, all-hands meeting where we played pin-the-tail-on-the-donkey or another time when I travelled across the country for a mandatory meeting where the primary thing that was accomplished was a competition to see who could build a toy helicopter out of Lego Blocks the fastest.

    When I asked people why we were doing these things, I was informed that it was to help us learn to be more creative. I learned something alright but it was not what they hoped I had learned. By the way, I won the helicopter competition, so there are no sour grapes here. :-)

    As I read Steven Johnson's book, I realized why we struggle with how to be more creative.

    It's because we spend too much time trying to experience an extrinsic-centric learning event when we should be refining the foundational components of what makes a human being a source of unlimited creativity.

    As I read his book, I realized why we are often more hit-than-miss when it comes to increasing our potential for creativity. His book also helped me understand why our creativity sometimes grows in leaps and bounds while at other times, we seem unable to recreate this experience, making our growth in creativity seem frustratingly random or lucky.

    Seven Key Principles

    Mr. Johnson's engaging writing style guides us through seven key areas that must be understood in order to maximize our creativity, the key areas being:

    1. The adjacent possible - the principle that at any given moment, extraordinary change is possible but that only certain changes can occur (this describes those who create ideas that are ahead of their time and whose ideas reach their ultimate potential years later).

    2. Liquid networks - the nature of the connections that enable ideas to be born, to be nurtured and to blossom and how these networks are formed and grown.

    3. The slow hunch - the acceptance that creativity doesn't guarantee an instant flash of insight but rather, germinates over time before manifesting.

    4.Serendipity - the notion that while happy accidents help allow creativity to flourish, it is the nature of how our ideas are freely shared, how they connect with other ideas and how we perceive the connection at a specific moment that creates profound results.

    5. Error - the realization that some of our greatest ideas didn't come as a result of a flash of insight that followed a number of brilliant successes but rather, that some of those successes come as a result of one or more spectacular failures that produced a brilliant result.

    6. Exaptation - the principle of seizing existing components or ideas and repurposing them for a completely different use (for example, using a GPS unit to find your way to a reunion with a long-lost friend when GPS technology was originally created to help us accurately bomb another country into oblivion).

    7. Platforms - adapting many layers of existing knowledge, components, delivery mechanisms and such that in themselves may not be unique but which can be recombined or leveraged into something new that is unique or novel.

    Insight That Resonates

    Mr. Johnson guides the reader through each of these seven areas with examples that are relevant, doing so in a way that hits the reader squarely between the eyes. I found myself on many an occasion exclaiming inwardly "This idea or example is brilliant in its obviousness and simplicity".

    "Where Good Ideas Come From" is a book that one must read with a pen or highlighter in hand as nuggets pop out and provide insight into past or current challenges around creativity and problem solving.

    When someone decides to explore ways of helping you or your organization be more creative and they are getting ready to explore a rah-rah session, an offsite brain-storming session or they are looking to play pin-the-tail-on-the-donkey, ask them if they have explored the foundational reasons behind what makes us creative.

    And then buy a copy of this book for them.

    I believe this book should be mandatory reading for every student, teacher and leader.

    We are all students of Life.

    We all at some point, teach others.

    And if we accept that a leader is someone who influences others and we acknowledge that everyone influences someone at some point, then we are all leaders also.

    Educational institutions, governments and corporations should make this book mandatory reading for everyone within their walls.

    "Where Good Ideas Come From" is a fun read as well as a profound one.

    May your creativity blossom as a result of exploring it.

    Create a great day.

    Harry

    5-0 out of 5 stars Brilliant (again)!
    For those who enjoyed The Ghost Map and The Invention of Air, Johnson's latest book is another amazing treat in which science meets history, sociology and culture.

    In Where Good Ideas Come From, Johnson examines the way in which people, environments and ideas meet. With references that range from biology, mathematics, neuroscience, technology, engineering, he argues convincingly that "analyzing innovation on the scale of individuals and organizations --- --- distorts our view" and that looking at patterns of creativity within cross-disciplinary contexts is far more fruitful. And Johnson is truly a polymath.

    Great ideas surveyed range from Tarnier's incubator, Baggage's Difference Engine, YouTube, double-entry accounting, the Phoenix memo, the DEVONthink database program, Gutenberg's printing press etc... But this is not about cataloguing ideas, but understanding their genesis and their development, in the context of their respective socio-cultural environment.

    The author does live what he preaches. In wonderful Johnson-style prose, he examines the "connective talents" of Carbon and extrapolates on the chaotic nature of innovative system. The books itself is highly original, and, given the complexity of its ideas, extremely accessible. You will not be disappointed.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Insight into creativity
    Creating a theory of innovation is not an exact science as the process is messy, erratic, and often catalogued with a high selective bias towards the final "eureka" moment. In his book, Steven Johnson attempts to unpack some of this process and proposes a framework of seven key themes:

    1. Adjacent possible: different innovations vary in their ability to unlock adjacent capabilities. In other words, timing matters.
    2. Liquid environments: from a coffee house to your lab, the environments ability to circulate ideas plays an incredibly important role.
    3. Serendipity: more often than not, it is a rare connection of two existing ideas that sets off a lightbulb, not discovery of a new one (see 2).
    4. Slow hunch: instant flash of insight usually comes from years of exploration, where at some point, those ideas collide (see 3).
    5. Error: many discoveries come about as an unrelated, and unexpected consequence (ex: penicillin) - be flexible with your ideas.
    6. Exaptation: existing components and discoveries can often be adapted to different use cases (ex: consumer GPS applications.. see 1).
    7. Platforms: where possible, build platforms and ecosystems that foster environments where 1-6 can be recombined at will.

    While the specific examples chosen by author can be argued with, and an occasional metaphor is stretched too far, the book itself is well written and very engaging! Great read.

    5-0 out of 5 stars The BEST BOOK I READ IN 2010 - Period!!!
    This is THE BEST BOOK I read in 2010. PERIOD. I am pleased to recognize Steven Johnson's work, Where Good Ideas Come From - The Natural History of Innovation, (Riverhead Books - Published by The Penguin Group New York, NY Copyright � 2010 by Steven Johnson).

    In an era when the U.S. requires some creative thinkers to point the way ahead, I urge you and yours to devour this work. This work is timely, a shape-shifter and contains, in my opinion, the type of thinking required for re-evaluating the current foundation, energy and trajectory applicable to individuals, organizations (BOTH public and private sector), entrepreneurs, diplomats, inventors, faith-based communities etc.

    What's the thesis of this work? Listen to Steven Johnson:

    "If there is a single maxim that runs through this book's arguments, it is that we are often better served by connecting ideas than we are by protecting them. Like the free market itself, the case for restricting the flow of innovation has long been buttressed by appeals to the "natural " order of things. But the truth is, when one looks at innovation in nature and in culture, environments that build walls around good ideas tend to be less innovative in the long run than more open-ended environments. Good ideas may not want to be free, but they do want to connect, fuse, recombine. They want to reinvent themselves by crossing conceptual borders. They want to complete each other as much as they want to compete." P.22 (emphasis is mine).

    The U.S. has always been heralded as the global center for innovation, technological breakthroughs and the quality of a university system that attracts the finest minds from around the world. At present, the U.S. seems to be struggling with a paucity of good ideas and its infrastructure - that has historically produced global admiration (educational achievement, patents, new industries, technologies, strategic partnerships and economic prowess) - has been characterized by a myriad of measures as "in decline."

    This book stirred my patriotic fervor, as well as my competitive and creative juices. It didn't just stir me up - it somehow rearranged some things for me - at a soul level. It is a uniquely hopeful book - a message of tangible, practical hope for global citizens faced with seemingly insurmountable challenges of survival and daily life.

    As Johnson writes, Reading remains an unsurpassed vehicle for the transmission of interesting new ideas and perspectives. P.112

    Thus, I am NOT going to litter this review with too many excerpts from Johnson's work that would encourage you to make a judgment that simply reading a review of it was somehow sufficient. Here's what happened to me after I read Where Good Ideas Come From - The Natural History of Innovation -- I immediately went out and devoured two of Johnson's previous, acclaimed works The Invention of Air and The Ghost Map.

    From time to time, cultures produce thinkers whose ideas are simply essential, timely and (hopefully) infectious. These people and their ideas seem to rise up at times during certain historical epochs when they are desperately needed -- and may be deemed counter intuitive to the mainstream thinking that seems to be widely accepted.

    As Johnson says in The Ghost Map: "The river of intellectual progress is not defined purely by the steady flow of good ideas begetting better ones; it follows the topography that has been carved out for it by external factors. Sometimes that topography throws up so many barricades that the river backs up for a while." P. 135

    Where Good Ideas Come From - The Natural History of Innovation is a force that pierces the barricades that are currently preventing the natural flow of human ingenuity from proceeding as constructively and as freely as it might. This book is inhabited by the essential inertia that is fundamental to our present and our future - individually and collectively.

    I can unequivocally declare this work to be The Best Book I read in 2010.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Enticing and Innovating Itself
    A most interesting book and one that is stimulating to read, IMO. I don't think one needs a high-tech background and graduate degrees to enjoy this book. Reading about the innovations is like reading a minibiography of the various inventions and inventors. Highly recommended.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Best Steven Johnson book yet
    I have read all of Steven Johnson's books, some more than once. He is one of only 3-4 authoers whose books I watch for and anticipate before their publication, so I was eager to pick up his latest, and not only did it not disappoint, it may be his most thought-provoking yet.

    Those of you who have read any of his other books, "The Invention of Air", "Mind Wide Open" or "The Ghost Map" will instantly recignize his lucid, well-researched yet casual tone, and in many ways he is building upon ideas brought forth in those earlier works, consolidating them and putting them together to form new ideas, an endeavor which ironically is one of the very concepts he discusses here.

    A better, though less eye-catching title would have been "How Good Ideas Come About". The book is not so much about where, as about what are the conditions most ideal for them. He makes some very interesting and convincing analogies between the natural world and human culture, and bouncing back and forth effortlessly between the two realms is very fresh and compelling.

    But even more than his earlier books, the ride along the way is extremely enjoyable. Fans of Ghost Map and Invention of Air will revel in the sheer quantity of "Wow, I never knew that" moments. But this book differs in approach: rather than delve deeply into one or two individual fascinating historical figures and extrapolating conclusions about human culture at large from it, this book starts from the cultural concept (the generation of innovative ideas) and surveys many historical examples to make his points. Each of these examples is fascinating enough to warrant a book all on their own!

    I have come away from this book totally affirmed for my penchant for working on 6 projects at once, and for "spacing out". And I've been energized and inspired. Thanks Mr. Johnson!

    ... Read more


    3. Aftershock: The Next Economy and America's Future
    by Robert B. Reich
    Hardcover (2010-09-21)
    list price: $25.00 -- our price: $15.00
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0307592812
    Publisher: Knopf
    Sales Rank: 568
    Average Customer Review: 4.2 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    A brilliant new reading of the economic crisis—and a plan for dealing with the challenge of its aftermath—by one of our most trenchant and informed experts.

    When the nation’s economy foundered in 2008, blame was directed almost universally at Wall Street. But Robert B. Reich suggests a different reason for the meltdown, and for a perilous road ahead. He argues that the real problem is structural: it lies in the increasing concentration of income and wealth at the top, and in a middle class that has had to go deeply into debt to maintain a decent standard of living.

    Persuasively and straightforwardly, Reich reveals how precarious our situation still is. The last time in American history when wealth was so highly concentrated at the top—indeed, when the top 1 percent of the population was paid 23 percent of the nation’s income—was in 1928, just before the Great Depression. Such a disparity leads to ever greater booms followed by ever deeper busts.

    Reich’s thoughtful and detailed account of where we are headed over the next decades reveals the essential truth about our economy that is driving our politics and shaping our future. With keen insight, he shows us how the middle class lacks enough purchasing power to buy what the economy can produce and has adopted coping mechanisms that have a negative impact on their quality of life; how the rich use their increasing wealth to speculate; and how an angrier politics emerges as more Americans conclude that the game is rigged for the benefit of a few. Unless this trend is reversed, the Great Recession will only be repeated.

    Reich’s assessment of what must be done to reverse course and ensure that prosperity is widely shared represents the path to a necessary and long-overdue transformation. Aftershock is a practical, humane, and much-needed blueprint for both restoring America’s economy and rebuilding our society.
    ... Read more

    Reviews

    5-0 out of 5 stars An important book offering critical insight into the true cause of the economic crisis
    AFTERSHOCK may well be the most important book written on the current economic crisis. I say this because it offers a critical insight that I have seen in very few other places: The fundamental cause of our problems is the relentless drive toward income concentration. The problem with concentrating income into the hands of a few people is that you take money from millions of people who would spend nearly all of it, and give it to a tiny number of people who can't and won't spend it -- but will instead save it, gamble with it, or invest it offshore. The end result is simply too few viable consumers to drive the economy.

    Reich points out that income for American middle class families has been essentially stagnant or declining for over three decades. The middle class has coped with this in three basic ways: (1) Women have entered the workforce, (2) People worked longer hours, and, of course, (3) We all relied on debt (credit cards and home equity loans) rather than income to support our consumption. Those coping methods are now exhausted, and we are left in a position where average Americans simply do not have sufficient discretionary income to support a sustainable recovery. The great American consumer class -- which was the driving force behind our prosperity in the 1950s and 1960s -- has been largely decimated.

    To his credit, Reich correctly identifies globalization and, especially, automation technology as primary forces behind declining middle class wages. At the same time, rather than enacting countervailing policies, the United States (beginning with Reagan) has gone in the exact opposite direction and adopted a conservative agenda that has actually accelerated the trend toward income concentration.

    The one shortcoming of the book is that Reich -- not being a technologist -- fails to anticipate how advancing technology is likely to dramatically worsen the situation in the relatively near future. As someone who works in this area, I can tell you that the degree of progress we are soon likely to see in automation technologies is historically unprecedented.

    To get a sense of what we may face in the future, I would strongly recommend that this book be read in conjunction with Aftershock: The Lights in the Tunnel: Automation, Accelerating Technology and the Economy of the Future. Both books offer an eerily similar analysis of the crisis -- both concluding that the problem is a dearth of viable consumers. Both books also propose very similar solutions: direct income supplementation. Reich proposes a negative income tax (which was supported by free-market icon Milton Friedman).

    Anyone who wants to understand the current crisis and the danger we face in the future should read both "Aftershock" (for its emphasis on political and social implications) and "The Lights in the Tunnel" (for insight into how technology and globalization will continue to transform the economy -- and lead to an even more severe crisis, if we do not act ).

    5-0 out of 5 stars "History does not repeat itself, but it sometimes rhymes" Mark Twain
    Every middle class American should read this book. Many observations about income disparities have been written up lately but Reich pulls the important points together in a powerful and accessible way.

    Reich's main thesis is that the current transition the US economy is under is misunderstood. Many of the policy elite (Geithner, Volcker) have repeated the familiar claim that Americans are living beyond their means. Personally I don't discount that completely but Reich's insight goes much deeper and rings truer: "The problem was not that American spent beyond their means but that their means had not kept up with what the larger economy could and should have been able to provide them."

    "We cannot have a sustained recovery until we address it. ... Until this transformation is made, our economy will continue to experience phantom recoveries and speculative bubbles, each more distressing than the one before."

    Anyone looking at the unemployment data since WWII has to wonder why the unemployment component of the last three recessions is so prolonged. Instead of a sharp trend up, there are long slopes of delayed returns to peak employment. (Google "calculated risk blog" and look at Dec. 2010 articles.) I believe Reich has demonstrated the main culprit this. To be clear, he is not describing the detailed mechanics of what triggered the Great Recession. (Nouriel Roubini has a good book that I would recommend for more on the financial fraud, leverage and credit risks involved - Crisis Economics: A Crash Course in the Future of Finance. ) But Reich is taking a long term view and exposes a dysfunctional trait of the US economy that no one can afford to ignore. It is this weakness that will delay the current recovery and continue to create greater risks in the future.

    Reich draws the parallels between the Great Depression and the Great Recession, particularly the imbalance of wealth concentrated in fewer hands and middle class workers with less income to convert into consumer demand. One of the fascinating devices he found to do this was the writings of Marriner Eccles (Fed chair between '34 to '48):

    "As mass production has to be accompanied by mass consumption, mass consumption, in turn, implies a distribution of wealth - not of existing wealth, but of wealth as it is currently produced - to provide men with buying power equal to the amount of goods and services offered by the nation's economic machinery. Instead of achieving that kind of distribution, a giant suction pump had by 1929-1930 drawn into a few hands an increasing portion of currently produced wealth. This served them as capital accumulations. But by taking purchasing power out of the hands of mass consumers, the savers denied to themselves the kind of effective demand for their products that would justify a reinvestment of their capital accumulations in new plants. In consequence as in a poker game where the chips were concentrated in fewer and fewer hands, the other fellows could stay in the game only by borrowing. When their credit ran out, the game stopped."

    Reich also shares a couple of powerful and disturbing graphs that show how the middle class has been squeezed and also how since the late 70s, hourly wages have not only not kept up with the rise in productivity but have remained essentially flat.

    Another driving theme Reich presents is the "basic bargain" and he evokes Henry Ford, the man that took mass production to new heights and paid his workers well:

    "[Henry] Ford understood the basic enconomic bargain that lay at the heart of a modern, highly productive economy. Workers are also consumers. Their earnings are continuously recycled to buy the goods and services other workers produce. But if earnings are inadequate and this basic bargain is broken, an economy produces more goods and services than its people are capable of purchasing."

    I was concerned early in the book that Reich would leave out some of the important complexities of the topic but he covered related finances, politics and even consumer/voter psychology in a succinct yet informative way. His summary of changes to the labor market in the last 30+ years was very good.

    His ideas for correcting this were interesting if perhaps difficult to implement politically. My take away however was that this is a strong indicator of how bad he thinks the situation really is. Many Americans may be yearning to return to "normal". Reich is the first to thoroughly convince me that it is not going to happen.

    This is a very quick read of 144 pages and is well worth the time.

    5-0 out of 5 stars The Widening Income Gap and the Beleaguered Consumer
    The defining statistic of this book is the fact that by 2007 the top 1 percent of America's earners garnered 23 percent of the nation's income. It hasn't been that high since 1928 which of course was right before the Great Depression. Robert Reich thinks that this is one of the reasons we are now in the Great Recession. The recovery, if and when it starts, will be very weak since the middle class has not gained any real buying power for the last 30 years.

    Consumers constitute 70 percent of all economic activity in the United States, and if they are no longer employed or overburdened with debt they can no longer be the engine of growth that drives the economy. Many say that this figure is too high and that consumers should learn to live within their means. Reich, on the other hand, thinks their means should be increased.

    There was time in American history that Reich refers to as the Great Prosperity, the years 1947-1975. (Read also Reich's book Supercapitalism: The Transformation of Business, Democracy, and Everyday Life (Vintage) for more on this period.) This was a time when income was more equally distributed. The top 1 percent received about 9 percent of the nation's income. The top marginal tax rate ranged from 70 to 90 percent.

    During the Great Prosperity a single earner - usually male - could provide a middle class lifestyle for an average family. Since then wages have stagnated and families have found other ways to increase cashflow. Over the years women entered the workforce, people worked two or three jobs, and finally, during the last decade, they lived on credit cards and home equity to maintain middle class lifestyles. Now they have run out of sources of income.

    Reich makes some suggestions that will have his critics up in arms. One of his proposals is a more progressive tax rate. In his plan the top 1 percent - those making over $400K anually - would pay a 55 percent marginal rate. This would be a relatively mild increase compared to the era of Great Prosperity. The top 2 percent would pay a 50 percent marginal rate and the top 5 percent would pay about 40 percent.

    On the other end of the spectrum, those earning less than $20k would be supplemented and the large middle class - those with incomes ranging from $50k to $160k would be paying anywhere from a 10 to 20 percent rate. He believes something of this magnitude needs to be done to get the economy growing again. But it won't happen in the current political climate.

    Many say progressive taxation and redistributive income is unfair, or worse yet, confiscatory. The fact of the matter is all taxation is redistributive. Taxation is the price of civilized society - to borrow from Oliver Wendell Holmes.

    The current Tea Party movement is doing the bidding of the super rich. They are terrified of the poor and, in their view, the undeserving ending up with some of their money. Unbeknownst to them, the better off the poor and the middle class are, the better off the super rich will also be. Reich's modest proposal will not only strengthen the economy, it will also strengthen our democracy.

    5-0 out of 5 stars It's the ridiculous income gap, stupid!
    We are slowing becoming more and more like third-world countries: a few ridiculously rich people; too many poor people; and what used to be the middle class joining the later. If anyone tries to point this out or do something about it the apologists for the rich (i.e., G.B. & R.L.) immediately cry "CLASS WARFARE".

    Robert Reich's Aftershock rationally and succinctly explains the mess we're in and offers solutions that should be adopted by the Obama administration ASAP. Unfortunately, if they try, Republicans and Tea Partiers will scream "SOCIALIST" but offer no alternative.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Excellent source of solutions than mere theories
    Okay so I actually bought this book through Audible but it still is his book. I found it to be very practical and relevant given the situation we are in. The remarks regarding ' The Independent ' party didn't surprise or shock me. R.R is known for his acumen, intelligence and his ability to bundle complex theories into simple text and understanding context. While explaining the current economic situation, he didnt get into what is a CDO, M&As, MBRM, ETFs and all the Wall street terms. Rather he focused on the core issues and provided explicit and specific solutions to back his ideas. That's what made this book different than others where we only hear what happened and what would've happened instead of solutions.

    I would highly recommend this book if you want some insights into how we got here and how we get out of this mess. I liked it

    5-0 out of 5 stars Beautiful, relevant but fatally flawed



    Fascinating, but fatally flawed; although Reich is probably the most knowledgeable, candid and relevant observer of the Washington Insider Establishment, he is flawed in expecting any sudden major change.

    In America, where a two-cent rise in postage stamps is cause for major outrage, "change" comes on little cat feet. It's the fatal flaw of Obamania with its brilliant rescues of Wall Street and Detroit auto makers plus reforms of health care and the financial industry; it's these revolutionary successes that have infuriated voters.

    Gratitude? "Wail Street" cried all the way to the Treasury; then, like pigs with their snouts in the trough of public money, stampeded the farmer who just filled their feed bowl. In his final 'How It Could Get Done' chapter of five and one-half pages, Reich offers a rational but revolutionary plan to rescue the Middle Class from 30 years of stagnation.

    It took 30 years for the "vested interests" with their Greed Is Enough mantra to vastly increase their share of American earnings and wealth. However, in America, revolution won't work; this is a society that trusts gradualism instead of upheaval. President Barack Obama failed this test of the American character; he expected a miracle from "Change" and instead got doubt, suspicion and fear.

    So much for Reich's conclusion. The other 134 pages are a cogent analysis of America from the Great Depression to the Great Prosperity and downward into the current Great Recession. Only the Super Rich are liable to disagree, primarily because Reich explains how they are usually the problem and never part of the solution.

    It's this analysis that makes this book so worthwhile. Granted, Reich cites more than the Super Rich -- even they aren't astute enough to cause all problems -- but the first step toward a solution is understanding the origins of the problem. Instead of rants and raves about the current mess, Reich offers a succinct and practical analysis.

    But then,who listens to intelligence instead of emotion in politics?

    5-0 out of 5 stars Our economy, a clear and concise explanation
    A very readable and interesting review of our economy, and what brought the US economy to the point it is today. This book helps to clarify what really has happened to our economy and why. Reich makes a good Rx of what could be done to help our economic future to be more equitable, by restoring the "basic bargain". I would highly recommend this book to anyone wanting to cut through all of the chatter on the "news" and have a better sense of what needs to be done to make a brighter future for us in the "middle class". ... Read more


    4. Oh, Yuck! The Encyclopedia of Everything Nasty
    by Joy Masoff
    Paperback
    list price: $14.95 -- our price: $10.17
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0761107711
    Publisher: Workman Publishing Company
    Sales Rank: 770
    Average Customer Review: 4.7 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    Kids love stuff that's gross. From the liquids, solids, andgases--especially the gases!--or their own bodies to the creepy,crawly, slimy, slithery, fetid, and feculent phenomena in the world atlarge, kids with a curious bent just can't get enough. Oh, Yuck! TheEncyclopedia of Everything Nasty brings together, in one book, all thegood things about some of the baddest things on Earth.

    Exhaustively researched and impeccably scientific, yet written witha lively lack of earnestness, Oh, Yuck! is an ants to zitsencyclopedic compendium covering people, animals, insects, plants,foods, and more. Here are vampire bats, which sip blood and pee at thesame time so that they'll always be light enough to fly away; andslime eels, wreathed in mucus and eating fellow fish from the insideout. Oh, Yuck! explains why vomit smells; where dandruff comes from;what pus is all about; and why maggots adore rotting meat. Otherfeatures include gross recipes, putrid projects, 10 foods that makeyou airborne, and more.

    With hundreds of cartoon illustrations and real-life photographs,Oh, Yuck! is the complete guide to the irresistible--at least to an8-to-12 year old--underbelly of life. ... Read more

    Reviews

    5-0 out of 5 stars I'm a grownup and I loved it!, December 4, 2001
    I bought this for my kid, no I didn't, she's only 3, I b ought it for me and she can have it when she gets older. And I'm buying it for two of my friend's kids. I've always been fascinated with gross stuff like snot, pus, poop, gross foods, etc., and so are most kids. And by the way, my kid, and the two kids I'm buying this for, are girls. The facts are there, it's fun to read, and it might even get the kids to read more and practice good hygiene while they're at it (microscopic photos of worms and such may answer a few questions like "why do I have to wash my hands all the time?" Excellent.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Laugh Out Loud Funny!!, December 17, 2002
    I purchased this book for my 12 year old son for Christmas. I have yet to wrap it because I am so interested in reading it! This is definitely a pretty disgusting book from a mom's point of view but I know my son will absolutely love it! Some of the illustrations are so gross they made me laugh out loud. There is a lot of scientific information hidden in this humorous encyclopedia. I have learned a lot already and I am only up to C. This book is a "must have" for any pre-teen or teenager, especially boys who are fascinated by disgusting things. I can't wait for another book by this author! Maybe social studies could be this humorous as well.

    4-0 out of 5 stars Interesting Facts About Some Yucky Stuff, September 2, 2001
    I bought this book to try to stop my preschooler from using "potty-language" every time he speaks - I thought if I explained, in technical detail, that bodily functions and other stuff is just a natural occurance, maybe he would cut his bathroom humor down. Wrong. While the book is entertaining and has a lot of facts that I wasn't aware of, it makes light of all things gross. So we laughed as I read it (there is quite of bit of humor in it) and I realized that almost everyone (especially young boys!) are just fascinated with stuff that drives us Moms crazy! Would make a great gift book for a "tween" ager!

    4-0 out of 5 stars Disgusting things for the whole family to enjoy!, July 8, 2005
    If you are reading this page, you already know that you want this book. It follows through on its promise to talk about disgusting things. It's even moderately educational in parts, so that your kids can learn why we have snot (among other things). Unlike, say, the Captain Underpants series, this is grossness that the entire family can enjoy.

    It makes the perfect gift from a grown-up because the child's eyes will light up when s/he realizes that you are cool enough to give a kid a book about gross stuff. Plus, the kid on the cover is picking his nose. What else do you need?

    5-0 out of 5 stars Iman's Review, May 18, 2004
    This is such a great book. It has information on all "gross" topics. In it, there is everything from maggots to vomit. I think this book would be great for all 7-12 year olds. I especially like the "information boxes". The book has good illustrations also. Most of them are comical, but a few are scientific. Joy Masoff is a good writer that specializes in history books. Also, this would be a great find for a teacher or science teacher because all the things in this book is true science! There is nothing inapropriate in this book. The thing that I like about this book is that it is funny, yet educational at the same times. That is very difficult to find in a book now. The thing that I disliked most in this book is NOTHING! The bottom line is, THIS IS A MUST READ!

    5-0 out of 5 stars A true classic, September 23, 2004
    I have been reading bits and pieces of this book out loud at bedtime to my 9yo daughter for months. She got it for a present at Christmas last year (from her Aunt who was an elementary school teacher and expert on children's literature) and didn't pick it up right away. But once she started reading it, it has been an ongoing touchstone.

    Some of it is quite gross and I must admit it turns my stomach at times, but it has a a lot of straight forward explanations of how our bodies work and how other things in the world that people her age (and older) are fascinated with.

    Now as to why it is a bedtime favorite - that I don't really understand or spend much time thinking about. Except for the fact that despite the quality of this book I am simply going to have to find something new to read soon.

    4-0 out of 5 stars GROSS WITH A SENSE OF HUMOR, December 17, 2004
    This is one of those things that you cringe as you read and feel your insides squirming...but it's just so funny and fun to read. The facts and irreverent tone of the book making learning about pus, snot, puke, and other bodily secretions a hoot to read about. Never though I would get a laugh out of reading about zits and dandruff before!

    It's all good fun and meant to be that way. There's a lot of interesting recipes and experiments you can make...I'd avoid them though, reading the book is gross-out enough without taking a hands-on approach.

    5-0 out of 5 stars It's nasty and the kids love it, March 23, 2006
    I bought this for my classroom bookshelf. I teach 7th grade science and my kids fight with each other to read it!

    4-0 out of 5 stars Gross!, August 6, 2001
    If you want a child (especially a boy) to read Oh Yuck! fills the bill. They can't resist the yucky tidbits. My teacher friends tell me that anything that a kid reads is worth it's weight. Intrestingly, this book is full of scientific facts worth learning. So you have a youngster reading, learning and having a great time doing it. That's hard to beat.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Very entertaining, May 6, 2005
    Can't seem to get enough gross stuff? Then this book is for you. This is like reading the Guiness Book of World Records but only reading the disgusting parts. Very entertaining and chock full of facts you never knew and not sure you really wanted to know. My kids think it is a hoot and we love scrunching up our noses at every page turn. ... Read more


    5. The Master Switch: The Rise and Fall of Information Empires (Borzoi Books)
    by Tim Wu
    Hardcover (2010-11-02)
    list price: $27.95 -- our price: $15.37
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0307269930
    Publisher: Knopf
    Sales Rank: 815
    Average Customer Review: 4.8 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    In this age of an open Internet, it is easy to forget that every American information industry, beginning with the telephone, has eventually been taken captive by some ruthless monopoly or cartel. With all our media now traveling a single network, an unprecedented potential is building for centralized control over what Americans see and hear. Could history repeat itself with the next industrial consolidation? Could the Internet—the entire flow of American information—come to be ruled by one corporate leviathan in possession of “the master switch”? That is the big question of Tim Wu’s pathbreaking book.

    As Wu’s sweeping history shows, each of the new media of the twentieth century—radio, telephone, television, and film—was born free and open. Each invited unrestricted use and enterprising experiment until some would-be mogul battled his way to total domination. Here are stories of an uncommon will to power, the power over information: Adolph Zukor, who took a technology once used as commonly as YouTube is today and made it the exclusive prerogative of a kingdom called Hollywood . . . NBC’s founder, David Sarnoff, who, to save his broadcast empire from disruptive visionaries, bullied one inventor (of electronic television) into alcoholic despair and another (this one of FM radio, and his boyhood friend) into suicide . . . And foremost, Theodore Vail, founder of the Bell System, the greatest information empire of all time, and a capitalist whose faith in Soviet-style central planning set the course of every information industry thereafter.

    Explaining how invention begets industry and industry begets empire—a progress often blessed by government, typically with stifling consequences for free expression and technical innovation alike—Wu identifies a time-honored pattern in the maneuvers of today’s great information powers: Apple, Google, and an eerily resurgent AT&T. A battle royal looms for the Internet’s future, and with almost every aspect of our lives now dependent on that network, this is one war we dare not tune out.

    Part industrial exposé, part meditation on what freedom requires in the information age, The Master Switch is a stirring illumination of a drama that has played out over decades in the shadows of our national life and now culminates with terrifying implications for our future.
    ... Read more

    Reviews

    5-0 out of 5 stars Brilliant and Informative

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    Warning: This is not light reading. The book is well-written but is not designed as entertainment. If, however, you are concerned about the Internet and potentially where it might go in the near future, or more specifically, how it might wind up controlled, this book will be an interesting and informative read. Important too because communication and information dissemination are vital to the freedom of us all.

    Columbia University Professor Tim Wu takes us on an in-depth tour of the history of the communication empires of telephone, radio, television, and now the Internet. Wu's analyses and conclusions are both brilliant as well as at times somewhat surprising. Every page gives evidence of Wu's thorough research, careful thinking and insights that went into the writing of this fine work.

    The internet has become part of the lives of almost everyone, with its freeing and empowering presence; in fact in important ways it has become indispensable. A not-too-surprising worry might be that the federal government may someday try to control it, not so overwhelmingly as does the government of China of course, but the possibility is there.

    What Wu so sagatiously points out is that that threat of control could just as easily, or actually more easily, come from the private sector, because in fact the existence of the internet and its smooth functioning are dependent, not on the government, but private enterprise. A different kind of monopoly looms ahead of us as a distinct danger, and this present information age presents new policy and regulation challenges.

    One hopes that the right government officials at the federal level take heed to this awesomely researched book.

    If you would like to understand more accurately recent decades as well as the present time the huge corporations that have in the past but also could one of these days control the ways and means of communication, by all means give this worthy work a read.

    Highly recommended.

    5-0 out of 5 stars A complex, complete and compelling story of business

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    The Master Switch is part history, business theory and technology presented in a clear and enjoyable read. This is neither a business book, nor a history book, nor a novel but it has the best elements of all three. Some advice for the reader, be prepared to read a book about business information and technology this is deep, complex, expansive and thoroughly enjoyable.

    Wu demonstrates throughout the book his ability to research and capture the historical events that led to the world we have today and present them more like James Michener than a dry recitation. The details and descriptions led me to feel like I was reading a historical novel more than a business book. Yet all of the conversation revolves round issues of information, technology and business ownership of it.

    Wu demonstrates his business thinking through the book and research findings. This is a business book as it discusses how information and new technologies often start out as an explosion of small companies that coalesce into a few dominate firms that then often explode into smaller more innovative companies. Those ideas, the decisions and actions behind them are the context that gives the business history context.

    The Master Switch is a rare combination of history, theory and technology. People looking to read the book from one of these perspectives will either be delighted or deeply disappointed. As a history, the book is a delight as I learned things I never knew before. As a business book, one with a very clear argument, sequential prose and an explicit `bottom line' this book suffers because it meanders through the history parts. Readers looking for a business book should reset their expectations and get the Master Switch. Reset their expectations from the perspective that rather than loading your brain with `programmed' messages, it may be better to get a broader perspective that will let you think through these critical issues. Setting your expectation to read something enjoyable, informative and comprehensive and you will not be disappointed.

    5-0 out of 5 stars The Incredible History of Information Technology

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    Unless you're very young, you have memory of the "Dark Ages" of technology. Yes, there was a time before the Internet...even a time before the ancient 14 kbs modem. I know it's hard for us to believe, but you used to have to be there if somebody was calling AND you didn't know who it was until you picked up the phone! The answering machine could have been available in the 1950s, but why didn't they come out until a few decades ago?

    The book has interesting points on technology cycles, which I'll get into in a moment, but first I'd like to congratulate the author on doing such a great job of giving a background history lesson. The topic helps because the history of information empires is every bit as interesting as the rise of military empires. It's all about strategies, "bloody" battles, and luck. It's just the weapons used that differ. Still, most of us have seen even exciting history made boring by poor writing. Mr. Wu keeps things interesting by giving the personal reasons for certain decisions and the circumstances leading to them, not just a bunch of dry dates. Some of the history discussed I was familiar with, but a lot of it was brand new to me.

    Several ideas presented on the cycles were thought provoking. Most of us are conditioned to immediately think monopoly = bad, but the point of view of the monopolists helps explain why society allowed them to exist. For example, before modern telephone infrastructure existed it almost took a gigantic AT&T to have the drive to force to link up every person to a phone line; while their methods of dealing with opposition were at times abhorrent, they still succeeded in using the monopoly's advantages (economies of scale, no duplication of research by different companies, steady income, etc.) to do a great deal of good. Bell Labs not only researched phone related technologies for the company but also provided resources and advancements in entirely unrelated areas. On the other hand, all was not altruistic. The same advantages that helped it expand and provide service also stifled progress as the monopoly jealously guarded itself against competitors and devoured or squashed possible competitors. They succeeded in connecting nearly everybody for the common good, even rural farms that likely would have been unconnected far longer because of greater costs per user in small population areas. However, those who are old enough will remember when there was only one choice of phone and it was an AT&T phone only. Once AT&T was broken up, we saw tremendous advances in technology and cost benefits to customers. The point being, things aren't purely black and white.

    The issues of information control and free speech were also fascinating. To me the most interesting was censorship in Hollywood. It's a lesson in unintended consequences. The big studios' very "monopoly" allowed them to succumb to rules of conduct that had married couples depicted sleeping in separate beds for years. In that case rules came from the private sector in the form of religious groups threatening boycotts. There too you see a dichotomy. On one hand, the threat was private individuals in a sense voting with their money and what could be more democratic than voting? On the other hand though, people who didn't agree with those rules had their ability to watch uncensored materials taken away from them in the name of somebody else's view of the public good. It's this kind of struggle for balance we see over and over and over again with the advent of new technologies.

    I love reading about history and watching documentaries. The adage "History repeats itself." is shown to be true time after time. It's funny how we all think we're so unique, doing things for the first time, but looking back (in some form) most everything's been done before. From the phones, to radio, to the Internet, you can see how the cycle of inventor becomes a wide open free-for-all becomes a tightly controlled industry, and eventually is usurped by some new idea from the outside that changes the rules of the game. It's all one big cycle of progress.

    Now if only I could figure out what the next major cycle will be, I'd be a very rich man...

    5-0 out of 5 stars The Rise and Fall and Rise of Closed Media

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    THE MASTER SWITCH is a highly entertaining tour of the history of today's major media industries: telephone, radio, television, motion pictures and the internet. It is also a work of theory, as Wu uses several lenses by which to view the developments in these industries. There is the "Kronos Effect" - where dominant companies swallow upstart firms who might grow to be threats; there is "The Cycle" - the constant push and pull between open and closed models; and there is "The Master Switch," which Wu demonstrates has been the constant goal of many a mogul and media titan, to centralize the flow of information so that it may be controlled by a single man. (They have all, so far, been men.)

    The book reads like an extended New Yorker article, with the personalities and drama behind the developments of revolutionary technologies sketched briefly, yet with riveting, compelling detail. Coming from a man who (it is claimed) coined the phrase "net neutrality," I expected there to be more theoretical discussion of what constitutes information control and information freedom. But in the end, Wu mostly allows the reader to draw his or her own conclusions.

    The chapter on how Hollywood films were able to be censored for years by a few pious moralists, simply because those censors needed only capture a few choke points, is particularly illuminating. This was not a government intervention, but a self-appointed private group. Wu implies that we need to fear similar interventions in our modern telecommunication systems since today's business leaders, Steve Jobs most definitely included, have designs on consolidating information behind their own Master Switches. It is precisely because so much telephone traffic goes through AT&T's switches, Wu points out, that the US government was able to enact its warrantless wiretapping schemes post-9/11.

    All in all, this is a fascinating, informative book, well-researched and deftly composed. Highly recommended for folks who liked THE LONG TAIL, THE TIPPING POINT or THE BLACK SWAN.

    5-0 out of 5 stars The Master Switch by Tim Wu book review 5+ stars

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    It is not often that you read a book that simply makes sense, and Tim Wu strings together a series of events evocative of the old "connections" TV show. Tim paints a picture of the difficulties that companies have cannibalizing current product lines and products in favor of the next big thing. By using AT&T and other companies throughout his book, you can see how difficult it would be for a manager to back the unproven "next big thing" when the current product set is still making tons of money and is very profitable. The picture that he portrays shows that companies are naturally disinclined to support technologies, processes, and ideas that are disruptive to profitable products.

    We can see this with Microsoft struggling with Cloud Computing, and the Music and Movie industries having such a difficult time moving to a viable digital model in the internet era. The music industry has railed against every change in technology since the player piano and sheet music saying that it would decimate sales, only to find a working economic model that would allow them to be successful selling sheet music and player piano roles. This book will leave anyone transfixed, and has information for people who are familiar with disruptive technologies as a product line as well as general people who have an interest in how disruptive ideas eventually work their way into the mainstream, even it takes 40 some odd years as it did with the voice message machine that we take for granted today.

    This book is truly 5 of 5 stars, I sat down and read it in one sitting unable to put it down. Well worth reading for all levels of interest from managers to employees, nonprofessionals to experts there is something here for everyone. Tim writes an eloquent book about technology, corporate and business model disruption, and why companies have a hard time working with disruptive ideas that might not be the next big thing. Moreover Tim points out why a disruptive idea might be more suited to smaller companies who can afford high risks, rather than a tried and true blue company that has different ideas of business lines and profit models.


    5-0 out of 5 stars Profound insights for the Internet economy

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    "The Master Switch" by Tim Wu is a fascinating history of information technology and policy in the U.S. with profound insights for the Internet economy. Mr. Wu is a gifted writer who seeks to share his knowledge with a wide audience through a highly accessible text. Indeed, as one of the world's foremost thinkers on the topic, Mr. Wu's timely book is certain to have a major influence as we struggle to maintain an open society.

    Central to Mr. Wu's analysis is 'the Cycle' or the tendency of information industries to move from open to closed systems. Mr. Wu documents how the telephone, radio, motion pictures and television initially began as low cost platforms that were more or less accessible to almost anyone. Sadly, we are reminded of the dashed utopian dreams of prior generations of Americans who had great expectations about the liberating potential of mass communications technologies. Time and again, we learn how capital swooped in, using their financial muscle and influence over government to control the markets to suit their own private, profit-seeking interests.

    Importantly, Mr. Wu shows how disruptive new technologies can set the Cycle in motion yet again. In nearly every instance, the challengers are first accused of criminal mischief, as in Mr. Wu's intriguing case study of how renegade cable operators challenged the broadcasting industry by connecting underserved communities with television service. Yet, as the upstarts validate their technologies by creating new markets, they frequently become the new, monopolistic sheriffs they once seemed to oppose in rhetoric, if not in deed.

    If we have learned anything, Mr. Wu suggests that when industry is left to its own devices the profit motive will trump the public's need for information every time. With the painful lesson of AT&T's calculated suppression of innovation and unflinching support for a Big Brother surveillance state firmly impressed upon us, Mr. Wu convincingly makes the case for a "constitutional" approach to regulating the information economy. In Mr. Wu's judgement, this means enforcing a separation of the powers that produce and distribute content (including, of course, the all-important physical infrastructure) in a way that allows fair and open access to all. Without such a framework in place, Mr. Wu fears that the Internet as we know it could meet the fate of other once-promising technologies. As his book makes abundantly clear, the possibility that the Internet could become the private fiefdom of an AT&T, Apple, Google or some other corporate behemoth and/or combination thereof should not be taken lightly.

    I highly recommend this exceptionally entertaining, informative and empowering book to everyone.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Information history worth reading

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    The Master Switch is an interesting read on history that many Americans probably do not know. In The Master Switch we learn that while knowledge is power, the ability to distribute information is more powerful. Movie, radio and phone technologies are covered extensively, along with the influences of multiple parties in how those industries developed in the US.

    These are powerful technologies with the ability to dictate the course of human thought and societies. Those that hold the power can either use it for the public good, or abuse it, but no matter how the power is used, that same power tends to want to perpetuate itself at the expense of innovation. The cycle is simple. A technology takes hold through small steps. Then it is consolidated over time, usually by a corporation, and with infrastructural considerations and support from government. Disruptive innovative technologies are slow to enter the marketplace because the giants are too large and present either huge financial or legal obstacles. Eventually, a disruptive technology cannot be ignored, and the old ways must adapt; just as TV replaced radio as a primary entertainment medium, and the web is slowly eroding many different telecommunication industries. Then the giants slowly embrace and work to control that new medium, consolidating power once again.

    The Master Switch makes a case for moderate regulation with the input of industry, but not at the expense of neutrality or diversification of power. There are some interesting ideas about net neutrality in this book, but in the end, the devil will be in the details, and it is still questionable if the cycle can be broken.

    The evolution of Bell Labs, ATT, CBS, NBC, ABC, Apple, the FCC, and google are contrasted and compared.
    Clearly written and interesting history worth reading and understanding as we at a cross roads of the cycle in regards to the continued evolution of the web.

    5-0 out of 5 stars The Internet Community Will NOT Accept A Master.

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    There are those who want to control the money/I care not what puppet is place upon the throne of England to rule the Empire,...the man who controls Britain's money supply controls the British Empire. And I Control the money supply. - Baron Nathan mayor Rothchild. The control of information is no less ambitious.
    There are those who have controlled the flow of information and want to continue to control that medium. The internet is in their crosshairs, and they have, without exception, hit every target medium of communication there has been to date.This then, has become the author's preoccupation: those who seek to control information/in the past, present and tomorrow...
    In Part 1 he traces the genesis of cultural and communication empires, in what he terms the first turn of the cycle. History has shown that the oscillation of information industries between open and closed is a typical phenomenon that Tim Wu has termed: the Cycle. He shows how each of the early twentieth century's new information industries(telephony, radio, and film) evolved from a novel invention.
    In Part 11 he focuses on the consolidation of information empires, often with state support, and the consequences for the vitality of free expression and innovation.
    In Part 111 he examines the ways in which the sranglehold of information monopolies were broken after decades.
    In Part IV he shows how the size & scale of the information giants led to a new generation of information.
    In Part V he looks toward the ultimate question: will the Cycle of history repeat itself. This internet revolution, which we are part of, is so explosive that no one can see where it would lead. Will the Cycle close or will the people prevail with an internet that is in the community's interest. In today's world of privitization, where the Public has become enemy #1, where the mantra has become: socialize the cost/privitize the profits/the fat lady has not as yet sung.
    The author likens the outcome , almost like the weather, the flow of information defines the basic tenor of our times, the ambience in which things happen, and ultimately, it will depend upon the character of our society.
    So, as Fred Freindly, onetime CBS News president, made clear, before any question of free speech can be addressed, comes the question/Who Controls The Master Switch?

    HIGHLY RECOMMENDED !!!!!!!!

    P.S. Those wishing to keep up on the issue of net neutrality
    google: Free Press Media Reform Daily & sign up.
    P.P.S. Goggle: viddler interview tim wu/click ahead 24:30 to 44:00
    and listen to show explaining net neutrality approx. 20 min
    P.P.P.S. The control of money is no less ambitious: google- Real Deal with Jim Fetzer/ then click- Friday Oct 15, 2020 Carl Herman

    google Fall of the Republic youtube

    5-0 out of 5 stars the cycle of every communications technology

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    As an IT pro with a strong interest in the history of technology (especially those I use every day), I thought I knew about the development and history of communications technology. After reading this book I can safely say that I knew practically nothing beforehand. Wu has gone through each of the major communications technologies - radio, TV, movies, cable TV, and the internet, and showed how they were invented, developed, and adopted. He discusses the individuals, the companies, and the government agencies that helped shape the way we use each of the technologies. The brilliance of the book is when he shows the parallels in all of them - how each technology starts as an open and decentralized system. Only after it is taken over by a corporation (often with the help of government regulation), does it become closed and centralized. He ends the book with what can best be described as a call to action for what he calls his "separations principle" where the producers and distributors of content are separated by regulation. Having showed the risks that come with allowing vertical integration in communications technology, the reader will almost certainly be forced to agree.

    Wu employs excellent scholarship and tis work is both thorough and detailed, making it the best arguments against regulated monopolies I've ever read. His writing is excellent - too many non-fiction authors try to dumb down their language for a mass audience. Wu has none of that, and it is a pleasure to read a book by someone who knows and uses the English language so well. ... Read more

    6. The Future of Learning Institutions in a Digital Age
    by Cathy N. Davidson, David Theo Goldberg
    Kindle Edition
    list price: $14.00
    Asin: B0030DGXY6
    Publisher: The MIT Press
    Average Customer Review: 3.2 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    In this report, Cathy Davidson and David Theo Goldberg focus on the potential for shared and interactive learning made possible by the Internet. They argue that the single most important characteristic of the Internet is its capacity for world-wide community and the limitless exchange of ideas. The Internet brings about a way of learning that is not new or revolutionary but is now the norm for today’s graduating high school and college classes. It is for this reason that Davidson and Goldberg call on us to examine potential new models of digital learning and rethink our virtually enabled and enhanced learning institutions.

    This report is available in a free digital edition on the MIT Press website at http://mitpress.mit.edu/9780262513593.

    John D. and Catherine T. MacArthur Foundation Reports on Digital Media and Learning
    ... Read more

    Reviews

    4-0 out of 5 stars A reflection on the effect of new technologies on higher learning, January 11, 2010
    The "Digital Age" that we live in has been the subject of many (too many?) books, articles, essays and blogs in recent times. Everyone who has not lived in a cave in the last few years realizes that the pace of technological advancement is increasing, and many of the traditional forms of communicating, working and shopping are continuously being redefined. Despite all of this, the role and the form of higher education have hardly changed, aside from PowerPoint presentations replacing most writing-on-a-blackboard styled ones. On the other hand, it is unclear whether any of these new technologies do in fact aid the learning process. As someone who has implemented many of these trends in college classes that I had taught, I have to admit that the jury is still out on the actual impact that the new digital technologies can have on students.

    This short book raises many interesting points and it provides references to several novel learning and publishing tools that I will be happy to try out. The book itself was written using some of those tools in a very collaborative process. It provides a prescription for implementing many of these tools and techniques in academia. However, it is not clear to me what exactly would the implementation of those tools and teaching techniques accomplish. In fact, there is very little hard analysis in this book that one can find in most social-science publications. Overall, this book provides more starting points for further consideration than actionable ideas for further development of higher education. It is a worthwhile read if one doesn't expect too much.

    2-0 out of 5 stars Not Supported By Scrutiny, August 12, 2010
    Davidson and Goldberg state that changes in communications technology in recent decades demand concommitant changes in how schools, especially colleges and universities, educate our young. I agree. But our authors take that premise and run with it in some directions which I don't believe are supported by the evidence.

    Our authors insist that conventional education, with its hierarchical social groupings and insistence on individual work, will prove completely unsustainable in coming years. I wonder if they have read their history seriously enough. Their warnings repeat, nearly verbatim, statements made when moveable type, film, and television challenged former paradigms of learning. A time traveler from 1975 might be astounded to see that videotape hasn't rendered teachers obsolete.

    They go on to extol "virtual" educational models which take place without "the contiguity of time and place." Which sounds good, but my own experiments with structural flexibility teach me that, if I don't require my students to be in a room at a certain time, more than half of them will never do the reading or write their assignments more than a day in advance. I doubt even Goldberg and Davidson believe that classes without classrooms will ever be more than icing on the cake for advanced students. They concede early on that "most virtual institutions are, in fact, supported by a host of real institutions and real individuals."

    Though some students love learning enough to be self-motivated, they are not the majority. Many, if not most, regard classes, even within their majors, as a nuisance. I would love it if my students had enough ambition to undertake the kind of team tasks Davidson and Goldberg describe, but anybody who has taught more than one or two semesters knows that if you get three students per class who don't need to be prodded, you are one lucky cuss.

    I found one comment our authors quoted to be all too telling. A respondent to an early draft of this paper insisted that "open-ended assignments provide the opportunity for creative, research-based learning." This is true, for those willing to embrace such opportunity. But this respondent sought out and answered back to a scholarly paper; I might get two students per semester with that level of ambition.

    I would absolutely love to assign more open-ended research projects. I would love to let my students take ownership of the learning process. But I have learned the hard way that they usually will not. I had two students drop my class this past semester because, even with five days' warning, they considered a ten-question reading quiz on a twenty-page chapter too onerous.

    Likewise, these authors repeat the claim, which I keep seeing lately, that Pokemon teaches youth important matematical and reasoning skills. I don't doubt this. But my colleagues in the Math Department tell me that only a handful make the leap that allows them to apply Pokemon-based math skills to diverse real world applications. Most still rely on the institutional classroom to make that connection for them. Regular students still need the skills and structure only a conventional four-wall classroom can provide.

    Consider Wikipedia, which the authors extol, claiming that professors disparage the site without merit. Yes, its many user/editors keep it up-to-date and Open-Source. Yes, the collaborative model ferrets out innacuracies. But even laying aside the limits of a tertiary source, its programming model leaves it vulnerable to pranks and hacks by idiots. Even that wouldn't be so bad if students utilized their discretion to screen out obvious bunk, but they don't. Too many students receive content uncritically, and I get papers riddled with inaccuracies.

    Institutional schooling has survived past changes in the media and cultural landscape because it works. Sure, it will have to adapt to the influence of the new technology, just as it has before. But as long as most youth need mature guidance to take on the skills and responsibilities of adulthood, there will be a place for a classroom with a clear leader judging progress. Davidson and Goldberg claim the old models have become obsolete, but that just doesn't bear up to scrutiny.

    4-0 out of 5 stars Will formal education adapt and evolve to a new reality? Should it?, June 28, 2010
    This kindle "book" is sort of a preview of a much larger work the authors are currently writing. In reality, this should be read like a very long magazine article exploring how the digital age may affect and is affecting higher education in particular and to a lesser extent elementary and secondary education.

    The "book" begins and ends, to its disadvantage, with a lot of jargon-filled commentary such as: "We contend that the future of learning institutions demands a deep, epistmogological appreciation of the profundity of what the Internet offers humanity as a model of a learning institution." (loc 50) Yes, yes, yes. This is college writing at its classic wordiness.

    Fortunately, once we get into the heart of the paper it gets quite interesting and more reader friendly. There are some big, important questions being asked here, such as, "Why go to college to get information when it can be found in 3 seconds on the internet?" and "Is the purpose of college really to learn skills under the tutelage of acknowledged experts?" (If that is so, why was my smallest class at Indiana University 8 people and the average was around 40?)

    The authors seem to be leaning away from the traditional expert model of the university and embracing the collaborative model of the Internet. They use the model of Wikipedia, which is the poster child for what is right and wrong about the internet. Anyone can edit it, which means anyone with knowledge can add to it, but vandals can also damage the site or ignorant people can include their "facts" as well. One of my high school students added his own name to the site for the band Korn as a "spoon player". It stayed up there for months.

    But, this model has strengths as well. As a group, we certainly know more than we do individually. The trick is using the experts to weed out the inaccurate information. The authors are especially interested in global participation - they are imagining projects with participants from all over the world, which is easily possible right now with sites plenty of online sites, not just public ones like Wikipedia. What they don't have is an answer as to how to connect the experts with the students all over the world and make sure that the "facts" that are being learned are actually facts.

    The meat of this paper is quite interesting and would make for a great classroom discussion. What will education in the future look like? What will college mean in the future - will it mean that an area of knowledge has been mastered or will it mean that the holder of the degree has demonstrated the ability to work towards an abstract goal for an extended period of time? I think the latter has been reality for a while now and the diffusion of information technology will only make it more so.

    3-0 out of 5 stars Raises Important Questions But Answers Them in a One-Sided Way, August 21, 2010
    "The Future of Learning Institutions in a Digital Age" is a free Kindle redaction of a larger book to come: "The Future of Thinking: Learning in a Digital Age." It proceeded from the MacArthur Foundation Reports on Digital Media and Learning, based on a collaborative work on this subject. The thesis of this Kindle book is that "the single most important characteristic of the Internet is its capacity to allow for a worldwide community and its endlessly myriad subsets to exchange ideas, to learn from one another in a way not previously available."

    As a teacher and priest, and one interested in how the new technologies are changing us, I found the book fascinating and that it raised many important issues. In short, I find that the book makes the reader aware of how the world is changing, especially the world of education, and makes the reader think about the relationship between technology, especially the Internet, and education. However, it makes promises based on misunderstandings of human nature and behavior without acknowledging the limitations and failings of Internet technology and the ways we use it.

    The first chapter is titled "The Classroom or the World Wide Web? Imaging the Future of Learning Institutions in a Digital Age." It argues that institutions of learning have changed far more slowly than the modes of learning offered by the Internet. Furthermore, rival institutions of learning such as the Internet challenge traditional institutions such as the hierarchy of teacher and student, credentialing, and restriction of admission. While these ideas are provocative, I find that there is a one-sided presentation that only looks at the possible positive outcomes of Internet learning and overstates its case. For example, it's unlikely that the hierarchy of teachers and learners will ever be abolished, even if the nature of these may change. There will always be some who, through experience, position, or wisdom, become the leaders of others. Also, the authors seem to assume that the fact that the Internet democratizes in terms of opportunities people have will necessarily result in equal outcomes. However, as in every other area of human behavior, people will not use the Internet equally, and, thus, there will be an inequality of outcomes. The section on participatory learning was useful. But here, again, the authors do not adequately deal with the issue. They raise the issue of growing dropout rates and the divide between those who are educated and those who are not, but they offer no solution - only a vague promise that participatory, networked learning will make things better. In extolling Wikipedia as a collaborative, participatory, networked work, the authors don't address the fact that Wikipedia is often inaccurate and that people with power, whether corporate (such as government, corporations, or political groups) or individuals (such as hackers) can manipulate information.

    The rest of the chapters are titled "Pillars of Institutional Pedagogy: Ten Principles for the Future of Learning," "Challenges from Past Practice" and "Conclusion: Yesterday's Tomorrow."

    Throughout the book, it's clear that Marshall McLuhan's proverb, "the medium is the message" becomes important in answering the question of what the implications are for Internet for education. In summary, this work raises a lot of the right questions about technology and education but answers them in a one-sided way.
    ... Read more


    7. Hot, Flat, and Crowded: Why We Need a Green Revolution--and How It Can Renew America
    by Thomas L. Friedman
    Hardcover (2008-09-08)
    list price: $27.95 -- our price: $3.53
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0374166854
    Publisher: Farrar, Straus and Giroux
    Sales Rank: 927
    Average Customer Review: 3.9 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    Thomas L. Friedman’s no. 1 bestseller The World Is Flat has helped millions of readers to see globalization in a new way. Now Friedman brings a fresh outlook to the crises of destabilizing climate change and rising competition for energy—both of which could poison our world if we do not act quickly and collectively. His argument speaks to all of us who are concerned about the state of America in the global future.

    Friedman proposes that an ambitious national strategy— which he calls “Geo-Greenism”—is not only what we need to save the planet from overheating; it is what we need to make America healthier, richer, more innovative, more productive, and more secure.

    As in The World Is Flat, he explains a new era—the Energy-Climate era—through an illuminating account of recent events. He shows how 9/11, Hurricane Katrina, and the flattening of the world by the Internet (which brought 3 billion new consumers onto the world stage) have combined to bring climate and energy issues to Main Street. But they have not gone very far down Main Street; the much-touted “green revolution” has hardly begun. With all that in mind, Friedman sets out the clean-technology breakthroughs we, and the world, will need; he shows that the ET (Energy Technology) revolution will be both transformative and disruptive; and he explains why America must lead this revolution—with the first Green President and a Green New Deal, spurred by the Greenest Generation.

    Hot, Flat, and Crowded is classic Thomas L. Friedman—fearless, incisive, forward-looking, and rich in surprising common sense about the world we live in today.
    ... Read more

    Reviews

    4-0 out of 5 stars Spurring on Energy Creativity, September 8, 2008
    Friedman writes on world population, the increase of the global middle class, and the growing energy crisis. All of this has contributed to a world that is in desperate need of an energy solution. The thing I like about Friedman's approach is he's optimistic and he's practical. His major points are...

    -- The battle over green (energy) will define the first part of the 21st century, just like the battle over red (communism) defined the last half of the 20th century.
    -- Everyone needs to accept that oil will never again be cheap...
    -- Off-shore drilling may be a temporary fix, but it's not the long-term solution.
    -- The fossil-fuel age will end only when we invent our way out of it...
    -- The last big innovation in energy production was nuclear power half a century ago, which is an important component to solving our energy problem, but we need additional solutions...
    -- In order to further real innovation we need people "throwing crazy dollars at every idea, in every garage, that we have 100,000 people trying 100,000 things, five of which might work, and two might be the next green Google."
    -- Friedman emphasizes the practical side of green - "It's the incredible sense of opportunity here. It's not just about saving the polar bears. It's not just about saving three generations from climate change. It's also about rising to the greatest economic opportunity that's come along in a long, long, time."

    In the end, he is asking for collaboration and innovation. Of course that begs the question - where does the money come from for all of this? It's always easy to point at the government, but when we look at where real economic solutions have come from it's most often private industry. I wish Friedman would have written on how governments can create environments were private industry is incentivized to create, invent, and discover. Even so, Friedman's book is a needed wake-up call.

    3-0 out of 5 stars A useful book on energy and climate change, September 8, 2008
    Overall it's a good thing that Tom Friedman has taken up the cause of renewable energy. This book is a useful contribution to the national debate over energy policy.

    The cause of renewable energy should not be a "political" issue. It's an issue that liberals and conservatives should work together on. Many conservatives concerned about our country's national security are already becoming strong supporters of renewable energy here in America. I don't agree with some of Tom Friedman's past views on economics but this book quite frankly is truly inspiring (particularly the last chapter) and sets a positive tone for people to work together.

    A key part of the book is the last part, specifically the last two chapters. Here's where he gets to the heart of the problem, political leadership and government policy. On page 375 he states that the needed energy revolution "will never go to the scale we need as long as our energy policy remains so ad hoc, uncoordinated". On page 407 he again emphasizes the need for a major concentration of federal government power to meet the challenge.

    In his interviews with top business executives such as the CEO of General Electric Friedman makes it very clear that America is not going to be able to unlock the power of private industry in an adequate manner unless there are major changes in U.S. government energy policies.

    Some say this is "tampering with the free market" but people should be aware that in energy as in all too many aspects of global environmental policy, there really is no purely "free" market. There are already huge subsidies for various industries.

    It's very encouraging that the cause of American energy independence is becoming a mainstream political goal. People might also be interested in the fact that legendary oil man, Boone Pickens, is now investing huge amounts of money in renewable energy and is running ads on TV on U.S. energy policy. He has set up a web site too. Part of his energy vision can be read in his new book The First Billion Is the Hardest: Reflections on a Life of Comebacks and America's Energy Future.

    I don't share a lot of Friedman's economic views but he is an intelligent journalist who previously wrote some excellent books on the Middle East. Friedman understands the disastrous geopolitical aspects of America's current addiction to foreign oil. He deserves credit for seeing that major government action is needed to reverse this.

    Along with this book I would recommend Lester Brown's Plan B 3.0: Mobilizing to Save Civilization, Third Edition. I have other relevant books in the lists on my profile.

    Friedman's high visibility makes this book relevant even if you don't agree with him. He has access to many important people, and their comments are in the book. Thus, the book is also a way to see what certain leadership elements think about the subjects at hand.

    I would recommend buying this book.

    5-0 out of 5 stars A Doable Win-Win Plan, September 8, 2008
    In Hot, Flat, and Crowded: Why We Need a Green Revolution--and How It Can Renew America, Thomas Friedman presents an irresistible opportunity for Americans--one that can save the planet and increase our wealth.

    The world is flat because of globalization--which is good, as ideas and practices can spread effectively. What is not so good is that our world population is exploding and countries like India and China are seeing an increase in wealth and subsequent buying power, which puts more strain on the world's resources and increases global warming.

    Friedman begins the book with a discussion of how America has changed post 9/11. He uses the example of the US consulate built in 1882 in Istanbul. The consulate was built in the heart of the city: "it was an easy place for Turks to get a VISA, to peruse the library or to engage with an American diplomat."

    Following the 9/11 terrorist attacks, the building was closed and a nearly impenetrable consulate was built. This all but stopped visitors from visiting. Although the new building does protect against attacks, it isolates Americans and impacts on how we are viewed and how we see ourselves.

    Friedman writes that he wrote the book because: "An American living in a defensive crouch cannot fully tap the vast rivers of idealism, innovation, volunteerism, and philanthropy that still flow through our nation. And it cannot play the vital role it has long played for the rest of the world--as a beacon of hope and the country that we can always be counted on to lead the world in response to whatever is the most important challenge of the day."

    That challenge is global warming. He proposes we begin a massive project called "code green."

    Friedman identifies three broad trends in our society:
    1. The post 9/11 building of walls around us to protect Americans from foreigners.
    2. Since the 1980's, politicians acting "dumb as we wanna be," meaning we will get to fixing the roads, global warming and other issues when we get around to it. This includes politicians like Bush "protecting us" from gas taxes and other unpleasantries to keep our standard of living, or the fact that we are in war and don't have to make any sacrifices (save the soldier's lives.)
    3. Nation building at home. This is the one good trend Friedman sees and he writes about the plethora of innovative, imaginative souls who devote their energy to finding green solutions.

    Friedman considers what is now called the green movement to be more like a green party. He cites several "green" books that include the words "easy" or "lazy" in the titles. The authors write books where: "everyone is a winner, nobody gets hurt and nobody has to do anything hard." I have read several of these books and agree--much of the advice is fluff.

    However, I do see the recent deluge of books and articles on sustainability as changing the consciousness and buying habits of the country. Many people who begin by making "painless changes" get serious about the environment and one or two of them may be the next inventor of the solar-run car. I also believe that when millions cut down on the use of plastic and other nonrenewable resources, that it does make an environmental difference.

    The increase in population and wealth and buying power all tax our already limited supply of petroleum, coal and gas--all substances that cause global warming and pollute our planet. Even if you didn't "believe" in global warming, it is a fact that petroleum--now needed in unprecedented amounts--is rapidly becoming an increasingly difficult product to procure. If you think spending $5.00 a gallon for gas for your car is a hardship, that price will be considered nothing in a few years. Folks, we are running out of time and oil.

    Friedman gets that Americans can use the diminishing supply of nonrenewable resources as a means for an economic boom, for bridging the widening gap between Americans and the rest of the world and for drawing us together as a nation. Americans are an innovative and smart bunch of people and we need to get working on devising clean alternatives to fossil fuels. This will create more jobs, strong economic times and raised spirits.

    Friedman presents a doable, win-win plan to raise wealth and to save the planet. A must-read.

    By the author of the award winning book, HARMONIOUS ENVIRONMENT: BEAUTIFY, DETOXIFY & ENERGIZE YOUR LIFE, YOUR HOME & YOUR PLANET.

    3-0 out of 5 stars Top-down vision that avoids some fundamental issues, September 12, 2008
    If you're not yet convinced that climate change is real or needs urgent and radical attention, this vision of a flat world -- with America on top -- may be able to change your mind. Maybe, thanks to huge sales, this book will able to open a lot of minds that needed opening; and that would be a good thing. Unfortunately, it won't open them quite far enough. While faulting others for not confronting the tough issues around climate change, Thomas Friedman (TF) avoids many of them himself.

    Other reviews summarize some of the book's main themes. This long review will deal with some of TF's more striking arguments, good and bad, that most others have not yet commented on.

    A. GOOD POINTS

    Some points I especially liked: It's great that TF is so explicit about his exasperation at magazine articles and books offering glib solutions like "205 easy ways to go green." He'd prefer our leaders "propose the one or two hard ways that could actually make a difference" (@ 400). His proposal for how a Presidential candidate might defend the idea of a carbon tax (@265f) is what we ought to be hearing now, instead of "Drill, baby, drill!" His description of why the US military is enthusiastic about going green (@ 317-322) is fascinating. And he bravely makes strong arguments that government regulation can be a good thing in appropriate circumstances.

    B. THE POINT OF GOING GREEN IS ... REGIME CHANGE?

    One curious feature of TF's argument is its emphasis on America's going green as a means of promoting change in other countries. TF's "Laws of Petropolitics" (Ch. 4) purport to show how "freedom" (or sometimes "the pace of freedom" (@96)) in certain oil-producing countries waxes and wanes inversely with the price of oil. (I won't dwell on the speciousness of the graphs, which use undefined units and misleadingly truncated axes for "freedom," which is sometimes political and sometimes economic.) America should reduce its demand for oil because of our "need to drive reform in the Arab-Muslim world" (@108; I suppose that means we think non-Arab Iran is OK as is).

    Moreover, new American technologies will reduce "energy poverty" in poor countries and enable the next Thomas Edison or Sally Ride who may be living there (Ch. 7 & @164). And the Chinese leadership will give its people freedom of speech because of our threats to "outgreen" that country (Ch. 16, esp. @ 367). Aside from these notes of noblesse oblige, TF's vision of other countries is only as competitors to America, not people with whom we should be cooperating (e.g., "America wins! America wins! America wins!" @ 242).

    What does America get out of this? The first chapter promises to show how going green will lead to "nation-building in America" (@9). But TF never returns to that topic; the impacts on America that he describes all seem to be economic. He also promises we'll get "more and more knowledge-intensive green-collar technology jobs - which are more difficult to outsource" (@23). What do these turn out to be? Construction jobs installing solar panels and retrofitting buildings (@338).

    C. GREEN'S IMPACT ON INCOME INEQUALITY

    TF seems blind about the issue of income inequality, especially within nations. Only four pages of the book (< 1% of the text) even come close to talking about income inequality in America; these take the form of an interview with a community activist from Oakland, CA (@335-339). Those construction jobs are the punch line, presented as a boon to the urban poor. How about the rest of the book?

    (1) TF regales us with a long utopian fantasy about the snazzy technology and perfectly working markets (unlike any in real life) of the "Energy Internet" (@224-236). He imagines "you" as having a real estate development job that you can telecommute to most days of the week. Too bad for folks who have manufacturing or minimum wage jobs, like the folks who flip your burgers; I guess he expects they won't read the book. Moreover, TF is excited by the idea that someday we'll all lease our household appliances instead of owning them (@71). A society of a few who own and the many who rent, even at the most basic levels of daily life? Sounds less like science fiction and more like a Charles Dickens novel.

    (2) TF enthuses about imposing a $5-$10 per gallon tax on gasoline, and using that money to offset payroll taxes (@262). Let's check the math. When I lived in Silicon Valley, I went through about 20 gallons of gas per week - and I had a home office. TF's gas tax would have cost me $5K-$10K per year (to say nothing of higher pre-tax prices per gallon). Plenty of folks commute more than 1 hour per day, because their jobs don't pay them enough to afford to live in the communities where they work; but let's assume they use only as much gas as I did. According to the 2008 US tax tables, a head of household earning even $43K won't have $10K of tax to offset. Even a married couple filing jointly with income over $60K won't have that much payroll tax - but they might have to pay the gas tax for two cars.

    (3) How about the day-trading class? According to TF, stock bubbles "have actually been a key driver of America's remarkable record of economic growth and innovation" (@259). The "overinvestment of billions of dollars in fiber-optic cable" left the infrastructure for low-cost Internet services after the bubble's 'pop'(@258). BTW, as I recall, that pop also resulted in a huge wave of job loss. It also wiped out the small investors who didn't have privileged access to IPOs, or the inside information to lead them to bail out ahead of the game. I suppose TF likes neutron bombs, too. And despite this, Americans' Internet access speeds are still way slower than those enjoyed in Japan and Korea.

    (4) To be fair, TF is almost as blind about the poor in foreign countries. His fantasy beneficiary of green technology in the developing world is "Senhor Verde" (a Brazilian 'Mr. Green'), who has a 1,000 acre farm, with high-tech tractors and sprinkler system. But the mean size of a farm in Brazil is < 150 acres; and as a mean, that number is inflated upwards by some megafarms. Roughly 40% of Brazilian farms are under 10 (ten) acres. In Africa and many Asian countries, that percentage is closer to 80%-90%. See, e.g., the paper "Farm size" by Eastwood & al. of University of Sussex (2004), available in draft online. Bottom line: when TF talks about Mr. Green, he's talking about a rich dude.

    TF's vision for the foreign poor is data centers set up by outsourcing companies, such as one he saw in a village in India (@166-169). One of his interviewees tells him, "[I]n the village, no one gives up these jobs." I'll bet. But keeping their jobs isn't necessarily up to them. Outsourcing work is especially vulnerable to being moved around the globe, according to the whims of the market forces that TF extols. See, e.g., Andrew Ross's outstanding "Fast Boat to China: Corporate Flight and the Consequences of Free Trade" (2006).

    D. UNASKED QUESTIONS AND UNPURSUED CONCLUSIONS

    The deepest problem is that TF doesn't question his key assumptions or pursue his arguments to their logical conclusions. Especially, he doesn't question whether American-style market capitalism might be part of the problem, beyond the fact that it relies on heat-based energy sources.

    (1) GROWTH & GDP: "I start from the bedrock principle that we as a global society need more and more growth, because without growth there is no human development and those in poverty will never escape it" (@186). Growth in what? "Economic growth" usually means growth in GDP, and TF never indicates he means something else (see also his discussion of China @ 345f). The usual assumption (not stated by TF) is that higher GDP per capita (GDP/C) is associated with higher "welfare" or "well-being".

    TF says "Too many environmentalists oppose *any* growth, a position that locks the poor into poverty" (@194). This is painting with a broad brush. First of all, GDP/C numbers don't tell you anything about how wealth is distributed. As Warren Buffett gets richer, our mean GDP/C goes up, but that doesn't mean your income goes up. In fact, check Wikipedia on "Median household income": although US GDP/C grew 67% since 1980, median real household income went up by only about 15%. Real median income is lower now than in 1999 - i.e., at least half of us are worse off since then, despite growth. Second, TF's blind eye overlooks that income inequality has been growing within nations, including the US. Based on US Census Bureau's computed Gini Index for 2007 (46.3), we're by far the most unequal of all developed countries. So it's not obvious exactly what growing GDP or GDP/C does for the poor.

    Moreover, TF doesn't mention that GDP/C can grow because of bad stuff, such as the costs of treating disease and cleaning up pollution - not really well-being at all. Or that the supposed relationship between GDP/C and happiness as measured in surveys is at most a correlation -- not a causation, as TF's comment suggests. (Or that whether such a correlation exists at all is highly contested among researchers, and that even the papers arguing most strongly for it ignore other obvious factors, such the relationship between happiness and recovery from a devastating war.) Or that despite growth, income inequality can lead to unhappiness because of perceived relative differences, even if everyone's income is improving in an absolute sense.

    Since so much of the book's attention is on America, not a "global society," you'd think that TF might specifically address the question of how growth benefits Americans. But aside from mentioning that to turn off growth would be "political suicide" for politicians (@64), he's mum on the issue. Bottom line from TF: growth is good for poor people somewhere, and for politicians in the US (or maybe everywhere).

    (2) GROWTH & CONSUMPTION: TF is a fan of consumption. He argues, through the mouths of interviewees, that consumption is necessary to grow the economy (@194), that we can "consume more and conserve more at the same time" (id.), and that with the right carpet design, "not only would you be able to change your carpet as often as you wanted without guilt, but you'd be producing massive amounts of jobs in America" (@71). As for energy, he wants to see "huge demand - *crazy, wild, off-the-charts demand*" for clean power technologies (@244; emphasis in original). His Energy Internet technotopia is a paradise for consumers who love to choose service plans.

    An interesting irony is that TF sees the main obstacles to changing America's energy mindset as lobbyists and failed political leadership (Ch. 17). Some American scholars of politics have observed that the same market forces that maximize our opportunities as consumers have sapped our power to effect political change as citizens, especially in the past 40 years or so. See, e.g., R. Dahl's "On Political Inequality" (2006) and "On Democracy" (1998), and R. Reich's "Supercpitalism" (2007). TF never questions whether the ultra-consumerism for which he cheerleads could be contributing to the political problem he complains about.

    But considering that TF's theme is energy, it's also ironic that he ignores economists like Nicholas Georgescu-Roegen and Herman Daly, who have pointed out that unbounded growth and consumption run afoul of the laws of thermodynamics. Economic processes aren't different from any other kind of activity, in that they all produce physical waste, in the form of heat or stuff. Just as you can't have a perpetual motion machine, you can't recyle all of that heat or stuff. The more stuff you consume (or produce), the more waste that results. (Note that Communism, which emphasizes unlimited production, is no less dumb than gonzo capitalism in this regard.)

    Yet while TF often stresses the urgency of addressing our energy problems -- e.g., quoting Dana Meadows, "We have exactly enough time, starting now" (@170) -- he doesn't want us to "opt for the drastic" by make any "radical changes in lifestyle" just yet (@194). Though he mocks others for their "easy" ways of going green, his prefers to stick his head in the sand rather than to ask whether our lifestyle has any physical limits.

    (3) ARE WE REALLY GROWING ANYWAY?: I was very happy to see TF criticize economists' use of the word "externalities" to describe pollution, waste and CO2 emissions (@260). That terminology disguises such problems as trivial annoyances. Farther down the page TF says "We have been fooling ourselves with fraudulent accounting by not pricing those externalities. ... We rack up stunning profits and GDP numbers every year, and they look great on paper `because we've been hiding some of the costs off the books'. Mother Nature has not been fooled" (@260). Right on.

    But now, as the Talmud says, let your ears hear what your mouth is saying. If our growth figures are "fraudulent" because we don't consider the true costs of pollution, biodiversity loss, etc., who's to say our economy is truly growing anyway? Or that the American versions of market capitalism and consumer lifestyle, both of which TF so staunchly defends, are really defensible?

    E. CONCLUDING COMMENTS

    I won't dwell on the many small quirky things that none of the zillions of people thanked at the end of the book were able to persuade TF to change, such as a mistake about when the current millennium began (@47) or an overly exuberant reference to "10,000 inventors working in 10,000 companies and 10,000 garages and 10,000 laboratories" (@ 244 - each of these people has a garage AND a lab AND a company?). But it's interesting that among those zillions of names the only Europeans seem to be some folks from a Dutch oil company.

    Interesting because many of the questions TF doesn't ask are being asked in Europe. And not just from the political left. TF mentions French President Sarkozy as an admirer of America (@ 177). That same rightist politician has asked two US-based Nobel laureate economists to come up with an alternative to GDP, in order to get a better measure of well-being and happiness. Moreover, many European thinkers on issues of energy, economic growth and ecology (among them Andr� Gorz, Dominique M�da, Alain Gras) often start from a deep analysis of the nature of human work, and its spiritual meaning. TF's approach, in contrast, is entirely materialistic and technocratic. [UPDATE 2009/09: Two pertinent reports available online are the March 2009 report "Prosperity without growth?" from the UK Sustainable Development Commission, and the September 14, 2009 final report of the Stiglitz Commission appointed by Pres. Sarkozy. While the Stiglitz Commission focused more on measurement issues than on policy, the UK SDC report questions the policy of growth in great detail.]

    The problem of human survival in the face of global climate change seems to call for cooperation, and some reflection about what we really want life to be. TF's proposal instead is for America to overwhelm other countries in international competition, with the help of market forces and smart appliances. Are "out-greening al-Qaeda" and "America wins!" really the best attitudes with which to approach this challenge facing all humanity (and, thanks to us, much of the rest of life on earth)? It's not clear to me that this is even good for Americans. We're humans, too, not just consumers and innovators.

    I hope TF will win over some skeptics about climate change. But if we don't think more deeply, critically and globally about the solutions than he has, we could end up in a world that's hot, flat, crowded, hostile and lost.

    2-0 out of 5 stars Too much book, too little value, September 27, 2008
    Tom Friedman has a great vision of future economic growth driven by energy technology. I enjoy reading his columns and watching his interviews. However, this book is far too long to get his message across clearly. I feel like have the book is him quoting experts to make an obvious point. For example, do we really need a whole chapter on biodiversity loss and his travels around the world to be convinced that there is a biodiversity problem? He takes far too long to get to his original (and valuable) ideas. I can read long books, but by page 150 (out of 400) I felt like I had read a lot but not gotten a lot that was new to anybody paying attention to climate change/environmental news at all. My advice to readers is to save their money and simply take a look at Friedman's past interviews and op-eds (all available online) to get his message.

    3-0 out of 5 stars Deeply Intriguing Ideas Buried by Breezy Style, November 20, 2008
    Thomas Friedman's writing is new to me, and from the glowing reviews of this book I expected a little bit more. [Update to review: Deserves 4 stars.] I'm a climate change professional and one of those "revolutionary bureaucrats" that he praises in his book for doing the real work in protecting human health and the environment (thank you, Mr. Friedman), and I agree with 95 percent of his ideas and solutions - especially placing the true price of dirty fuel back onto the consumer (only then will people choose clean energy over dirty fuels). I originally gave this book three stars mostly because it felt like a review of things I've already read, and it could have been written a little better. However, the book earns five stars if it's one of your first three books on the impacts of global warming.

    Although the book puts together important ideas, my primary disappointment with the book is that it reads like one especially long newspaper article, very light and breezy, and almost glib in tone at times. A much better book if you want more on climate change and its impacts upon human societies is "Hell and High Water - Global Warming, the Solution and the Politics - and What We Should Do" by Joseph Romm.

    I've also read thousand-page compendiums on climate change, so to me, the science of global warming is incontrovertible. That part of his book didn't require convincing for me. I'm not an economist, so I could not evaluate his economical solutions to the degree I'd like, although I do agree that externalities should be included back into the price of everything, especially chemicals, fuels, or processes that are harmful to the environment. One of my main disagreements I have with Mr. Friedman is that growth in the third world is necessary or good. Even the author admits that the world can't sustain any more Americas.

    At least Mr. Friedman is exactly spot on about how the "green revolution" is more of a "green party", where everybody gets to feel good without actually accomplishing anything. If we want to keep the world livable for us humans, I'm certain that big changes, painful changes will have to take place.

    I am also fairly certain that voluntary behavior change will not be enough to limit carbon dioxide emissions into the air. Which do you think is easier?
    1): Convince the average motorist that high-mileage hybrid vehicles are the best vehicle to buy (even though they cost more upfront); or
    2): Mandate higher minimum fuel efficiency standards that all vehicles must meet.

    Personally, I know fuel efficiency standards work, because they worked in the 1970s very well. As for voluntary behavior, what is the market penetration of hybrid vehicles? A lot less than 5 percent. I'm an environmentalist, but I will not buy a hybrid until the price of gas becomes very, very, expensive.

    Stay tuned, I think climate change is the most important story of our times. In a few years, the economic downturn (in late 2008) will be in the past, gasoline will be at $7 to $8 per gallon, and we will still be trying to keep the planet from turning into a desert - only the later we start to make meaningful change, the more difficult it becomes.

    1-0 out of 5 stars Hugely disappointed, June 20, 2009
    I was expecting this book to start talking about some solutions at least at the half way mark but it goes on and on giving examples after examples of how each part of the world is now hot flat and crowded. I think most of us got that point very early on in the book but the repetition was just not necessary unless there was a word or page target that Thomas Friedman was aiming for. By the time I reached to the solutions part, I was taken straight into this futuristic place where you had the intelligent grid that would reduce our energy consumption and solve all our energy problems. As I said earlier I was expecting to see varied solutions but was disappointed to go through so much repetitive info that i had no patience at the end to finish the last part.

    5-0 out of 5 stars A manifesto for our times, November 17, 2008
    What a timely book! Following an election in which the future of the planet was hotly debated, the market is ripe for this accessible yet information-packed treatise on the perilous state of the environment, how we got here and how we must proceed if we are to avoid catastrophe.

    Thomas L. Friedman, the Pulitzer Prize-winning foreign affairs journalist for the New York Times, is known for his ability to synthesize information from diverse sources. He uses the first half of the book to thoroughly convince us that we do indeed have a problem, and a very grave one. In his past books, Friedman has argued that globalization is "flattening" the world, making competition between countries more possible and more fair. China and India's booming economies are giving millions more people opportunities to move up to the middle class. These millions feel they deserve a better life --- better being defined as more comfortable, consuming more resources like their American brothers and sisters.

    The problem is that we are quickly running out of the cheap, dirty fuel that allowed the first world countries to develop. But increasing carbon dioxide emissions from dirty fuels like oil and coal are contributing to what Friedman terms "global weirding." Add to this mix burgeoning population growth, and you get a world that is hot, flat and crowded. Friedman provides plenty of scientific support to back up his claims that life as we know it (cheap gas, cheap energy, a human-friendly climate) is endangered, one way or another. As he puts it, "if we don't make the hard choices, nature will make them for us."

    The second half of the book is a guided tour through what some of those "hard choices" may be. "Green" must be more than a fad, he argues, and every magazine article that touts "easy" ways to save the planet does a disservice by trivializing what may in fact be deadly serious. Yet Friedman believes we are up to the task and that America must lead the way in both innovation and conservation. He describes a new Energy-Climate era in which information technology meets energy technology. In his vision, our washer, dryer and refrigerator become smart appliances that communicate with a revolutionized energy grid to buy electrons when they are cheapest. No matter whether our cars are plugged in at home or in a parking lot, they can both buy and sell electricity, depending on whether they need it or have it.

    But to get to this sustainable utopia, our government and culture need to make investments now. We have to engineer our economy so that alternative energy innovations are made because industry knows they will be competitive. If that means keeping gasoline prices above $4/gallon in order to do so, so be it. If we doubt that will work, we need only look to Europe, where gas prices are astronomical and small, energy-efficient cars are the norm.

    America must lead, Friedman argues, or we'll be forced to play catch-up with China and India. He introduces us to some American companies and universities already innovating toward a clean, sustainable future and examines what other countries are doing as well. We need a course correction, and with HOT, FLAT, AND CROWDED, Friedman has provided a manifesto for our times.

    --- Reviewed by Eileen Zimmerman Nicol

    3-0 out of 5 stars Hot, Flat, and Crowded, February 15, 2009
    The central argument in this book is that the market does not efficiently allocate investment to cleaner alternative fuels because of externalities associated with use of "dirty" fossil fuels. Externalities, in this context, are costs that are not paid by fuel consumers but rather by society as a whole (pollution) or even by future generations (climate change caused by CO2 emissions). Market participants don't factor these costs into their decisions because they don't have to pay them. This market failure creates an opportunity for the government to increase efficiency by raising the price of carbon-based fuels so that the price paid by consumers reflects their full cost to society. When alternative fuels are more price competitive, R&D will increase, and advances in technology will bring down the cost of alternative fuels. This is an eminently reasonable argument, and Friedman also does a good job of explaining how high oil prices strengthen authoritarian leaders in oil-rich states.

    Much of the rest of his book is not as valuable. Friedman is highly critical of market processes - he sees market failures everywhere - but he seems to lose his critical judgment when he looks at government processes. He wants "revolutionary bureaucrats" to assume a much larger role in shaping investment decisions, but he blithely assumes that regulators are farsighted technocrats rather than self-interested political actors. Elsewhere, Friedman laments the need to obtain the support of citizens for initiatives that they will pay for. An entire chapter is dedicated to a fantasy that a benevolent dictator - whose views are identical to Friedman's - might dramatically increase environmental regulation over fossil fuels while weakening environmental regulation over nuclear power, electricity transmission lines, and the other infrastructure that Friedman needs to achieve his vision for a United States powered by "clean electrons."

    Many of his arguments might also be criticized as poorly supported or unbalanced. Friedman is a popularizer and explainer, and the standard of evidence in a popular book need not be as high as in a book aimed at specialists. Still, his standard does not rise much above "I think that ..." or "someone I interviewed thinks that ...." This might not be such a big problem except that Friedman only interviews people that he agrees with. For example, in advocating that the news media should more actively promote the link between human activity and climate change, he cites the views of former Clinton administration official Jospeh Romm, who thinks that the news media underplay the link because they are overly concerned with their role as "honest brokers" of information. Maybe Romm and Friedman believe this, but I would guess that most people take a more skeptical view of our news media. Elsewhere, Friedman asserts that the "worst" fossil fuel companies "know their products are as harmful to society and the planet as cigarette smoking." This is a surprising statement, and it might even be true, but Friedman does not present any evidence for it. As a final example, Friedman calls Hurricane Katrina a "flashing red light" alerting us to global warming. Maybe Friedman is right, but in the absence of any evidence, readers might well conclude that the link he draws between climate change and this specific storm is speculative.

    4-0 out of 5 stars can the laggard lead?, November 11, 2008
    When my family was in Germany in 1990, our friends pulled up to a stop light and obeyed a traffic signal that instructed them to turn off the engine to save fuel and spare the air. Brazil and Denmark have already attained energy independence from Middle East oil. Japan and Europe have fuel economy standards of 35 miles per gallon; the United States won't match that until 2020. In 2004, demand for scrap metal in China was so strong that manhole covers started disappearing from around the world; thieves stole them, chopped them up, and sold them to China. 150 covers went missing in Chicago. Every mile you drive your car you emit a pound of CO2 into the air (and China is adding 14,000 cars every day to its roads). Welcome to what Thomas Friedman calls Code Green.

    Friedman has his critics. His breezy style, jingoistic cheerleading, and free market optimism about profit-motives can be irritating. Others haven't forgiven him for supporting the Iraq war or for his rosy prognosis about globalization. He has a whole chapter in his newest book about why going green will never be easy, but he specifically denies that Americans need to cut their consumption habits because he believes that capitalism can grow a bigger and cleaner pie for all. Everyone knows that America is by far the biggest eco-laggard, but he insists that we can be the world's leader. In a critical review in The New York Review of Books (November 6, 2008: http://www.nybooks.com/articles/22027), Bill McKibben describes Friedman's vision as a "green fantasia." In the New Yorker (November 10, 2008), Ian Parker contrasts Friedman's carefully crafted persona as your Average Neighbor with his own eco-footprint, namely, the 11,400 square foot mansion he and his wife built a few years ago.

    Still, if our country has any hope for mobilizing the general public in an environmental movement that would match the urgency of the civil rights movement, Thomas Friedman is probably as good as it gets. He's won three Pulitzer Prizes, and his books have been translated into thirty-four languages. He's done his homework and traversed the globe. For many readers, whatever Friedman writes deserves careful attention, and with the current crisis that's a good thing.

    The "flattening" of the world that he described in The World is Flat (which has sold four million copies), global warming, and the population explosion all converge, says Friedman, to create five key problems -- energy and natural resource supply and demand, petrodictatorships, climate change, energy poverty, and biodiversity loss. His book describes these problems with a blizzard of anecdotes, facts and figures, and then proposes how we can address them. Friedman sees both a global obligation but also a national opportunity for America to renew itself. There are many moving parts that must act in concert toward the same goal -- governments, international treaties, free market and profit-motivated innovators, laws and legislators on the international, national and local levels, industry regulators, NGOs, personal virtue, civic activism, and bold leadership. Friedman describes himself as a "sober optimist," but he admits that there's a very thin line between dire pessimism that we've reached an irreversible tipping point due to apathy and inaction, and optimism that human ingenuity can rise to the occasion. ... Read more


    8. The Rational Optimist: How Prosperity Evolves
    by Matt Ridley
    Hardcover (2010-06-01)
    list price: $26.99 -- our price: $16.19
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 006145205X
    Publisher: Harper
    Sales Rank: 1478
    Average Customer Review: 4.2 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    Life is getting better—and at an accelerating rate. Food availability, income, and life span are up; disease, child mortality, and violence are down — all across the globe. Though the world is far from perfect, necessities and luxuries alike are getting cheaper; population growth is slowing; Africa is following Asia out of poverty; the Internet, the mobile phone, and container shipping are enriching people’s lives as never before. The pessimists who dominate public discourse insist that we will soon reach a turning point and things will start to get worse. But they have been saying this for two hundred years.

    Yet Matt Ridley does more than describe how things are getting better. He explains why. Prosperity comes from everybody working for everybody else. The habit of exchange and specialization—which started more than 100,000 years ago—has created a collective brain that sets human living standards on a rising trend. The mutual dependence, trust, and sharing that result are causes for hope, not despair.

    This bold book covers the entire sweep of human history, from the Stone Age to the Internet, from the stagnation of the Ming empire to the invention of the steam engine, from the population explosion to the likely consequences of climate change. It ends with a confident assertion that thanks to the ceaseless capacity of the human race for innovative change, and despite inevitable disasters along the way, the twenty-first century will see both human prosperity and natural biodiversity enhanced. Acute, refreshing, and revelatory, The Rational Optimist will change your way of thinking about the world for the better.

    ... Read more

    Reviews

    4-0 out of 5 stars A History of Progress, May 22, 2010

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    Matt Ridley's The Rational Optimist is a history of progress based on a simple but unpopular idea: that specialization and markets are the prime movers of progress. In fact, Ridley suggests in his introduction that the answer to the perennial "What makes humans unique?" question is our unique ability to specialize and trade. Instead of catching our own food, making our own shelter, etc (as other animals do), we humans have created a system where everyone can specialize and trade with others who specialize in other things. This means that those best at making houses make houses, those best at making food make food, and by trading, we can each benefit from that which others do and vice versa. Self-reliance equals subsistence: interdependence through trade equals ingenuity and a boom in living standards.

    "What?!" you say. What about Rousseau, Marx, Ehrlich, Marcuse, and all of those other critics of society! What about all the stuff we hear about how capitalism exploits the poor, reduces living standards, rapes the environment, etc, etc. The first few chapters of Ridley's book are devoted to showing that, on all fronts, markets have actually produced higher living standards FOR ALL (and especially the poor, as also shown in Sowell's Economic Facts and Fallacies), MORE leisure time for all, and - here's the most surprising - better environmental conditions.

    The next several chapters are a history of how this progress happened. To be honest, these chapters may be the most dry as they are very detail-laden and repetitive in that they stress the same theme across time - that specialization leads to ingenuity and progress. In the vein of Robert Wright's Nonzero: The Logic of Human Destiny, Ridley demonstrates - and explains the principle behind - this equation. In brief, when humans invented the idea of specialization and trade, I could make x and you could make y, things we each excel at. Each of us, then, can trade what we excel at for what others excel at rather than having to do all of it ourselves. Finally, when I realize that I can trade my x's for your y's and her z's, it pushes me to be as productive at making my x's as possible (and innovating new ways to make better and faster x's) so that I can make the most of my time. Thus, we stumble upon a brilliant non-zero sum way to ensure that we all benefit from each other's ingenuity, creativity, and labor. Most of these chapters (starting in the stone-age and ending in the present) stress the idea that as transportation allowed us to trade with increasingly larger groups, and as technology allowed us to create more efficiently, the "collective brain" became bigger and everyone could benefit from everyone else's progress.

    The last three chapters may be the most controversial as they deal with current naysayers - particularly environmentalists. To be clear, RIDLEY IS NOT ADVOCATING THAT WE CONTINUE CURRENT ENVIRONMENTAL PRACTICES (I bold that because inevitably, some folks will accuse him of an environmental Pollyanna-ism.) Yes, depending on non-renewable fuel, by definition, means that at some point, the fuel will run out. Ridley only points out that naysayers rely on a hidden but faulty premise: that the future will resemble the past. Yes, we will run out of fossil fuels if we keep using it, but whose to say that we will keep using them? Just like Ehrlich's remarkably failed prediction that over-population will lead to food shortages, these folks' error lies in assuming that future ways of production will resemble past ways, and time and time and time again, this assumption has proved erroneous! Ridley's point is that while we can NEVER say that the future WILL solve all pressing problems, so far we have. And we can assume we will in the future because our method of exchange has globalized the "collective brain," assuring that innovation will keep occurring and the best minds will all be working on the pressing problems of the day. (Again, Ridley is not attempting Pollyanna-ism here, but only suggesting that the burden of proof should now lie on the naysayers because the past gives us every reason to think that we will, rather than will not, solve the problems that confront us.)

    Now, for two minor criticisms of the book. First, I do question whether Ridley has the knowledge base to go into as much history as he does. When looking through the large endnote section, many of his citations are from non-peer-reviewed trade books, magazines, etc. I simply have a feeling that Ridley's book may not be as academically rigorous as some might want.

    I also question Ridley's omission of the crucial function language plays in his theory, for he doesn't spend much time on it. When he asks, as he does repeatedly, what it is about humans over other animals that have been able to create trade networks and specialization, it seems that ONE of the obvious answers is "language." We have the ability to create language that is not only self-expressive but also can be used to inform others of our intent, etc. It seems difficult to create a trade network without the kind of language that can let others know your intent, establish trust, etc. If this is correct, Ridley's shouldn't omit the topic. If it is wrong, he might have explained why.

    Be that as it may, this is still a great read. In a world where pessimism simply sells (and makes one sound intellectual) more than optimism, books like these need to be written... and read.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Will our future be 2,000 more years of immanent apocalypse?, May 8, 2010

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    First, the GOOD NEWS: the sky isn't falling! The world is actually improving dramatically and the pace is quickening. Tthere are abundant facts to prove it. The BAD NEWS predicted isn't true after all. The not-so-good news is that good news doesn't sell newspapers or prime-time ads. So we'll keep on hearing that doomsday drumbeat of horrific predictions from the media, all of it certified by officials of academia and government with an obvious agenda in the vision of impending environmental collapse which can only be averted by comparably drastic intervention. We have a glut of popular books and articles feeding these fears with plausible evidence for the demise of civilization or the planet, but a critical shortage of books like "The Rational Optimist" which challenge that evidence, describe its pathologies, and show where those disastrously coercive interventions will lead, and what they'll cost in human terms. So why risk ostracism in cocktail-party conversation by reading a persuasive contrarian essay which proclaims a heretical optimism in its title?

    Well, one reason might be the pleasures of an utterly readable book. Unlike talk-show polemicists, Matt Ridley uses good-natured eloquence, serious erudition and incisive wit to deflate the immanent-disaster scenarios which dominate our evening news, academic and political discourse. Despite its length, the book is remarkable for its brevity and the sheer quotability of its prose. (A reader cribbing zinger quotes will soon have writer's cramp.)

    Another reason might be the challenge of unfamiliar ideas, of cleaning the mental attic of the baggage left by cultural osmosis. No book can guarantee final truth, but a fresh perspective can provide plenty of creative stimulation for a skeptical mind. Ridley's long view of human history, his perspective on the unrequited human penchant for seeing immanent catastrophe informs both his skepticism and his optimism, and it makes great straight-to-the point reading. No obfuscatory jargon, no shrill hype or invective.

    Two of his unfashionable heresies are A) that prosperity is a hugely positive benefit to humanity--not a planet-killing consumerist fetish, and that B) individual freedom--not government planning or humanitarian intent--is the primary engine of that prosperity. His earlier book, "The Red Queen" described sex as the primary engine of evolution. The sexual metaphor gets new life in this one. The explosive growth of human knowledge and wealth in recent centuries is described as the result of "ideas having sex"--something that rarely occurred in prior millennia. It's not a coincidence that science, individual liberty, and the industrial revolution experienced a virtually simultaneous birth. This "sex" between ideas has been increasing in both quality and frequency with cumulative results of stunning usefulness. Think of what's happened in your own lifetime.

    He's also compiled a list of dire prophecies which never happened, some of which are perennially predicted anew with updated "tipping point" projections: worldwide starvation, hydrocarbon exhaustion, mass extinctions, nuclear extermination, mineral resource depletion, genetic decay (eugenics was invented to prevent that) global cooling (global warming could be next if the last decade's weather stasis continues). Environmental problems which were once big news (acid rain, industrial hormone mimicry, lung-rotting smog, skyrocketing cancer proliferation, holocaust viral epidemics, etc.) quietly vanished from the news when the threat receded or failed to produce significant harm, much less bio-Armageddon. A historical batting average of .000 has done little to discourage fresh predictions of the apocalypse.

    A minor focus is the relatively harmless rash of costly and often foolish environmental fads. He writes penetrating analyses the value and costs of organic farming, local food, and the obsessive horror of modern chemistry, fertilizers, pesticides, and genetically modified crops.

    His more deserving targets (I think) are the dubious "green" technologies with high--often disastrous--environmental costs: ethanol in particular, but also solar, wave & wind power. He's not opposed to the latter energy options in principal, but shows they're unlikely to replace hydrocarbons anytime soon. Most of these alternative energy "cures" are not only environmentally worse than the "disease" (fossil fuel), but their their high costs will be borne in heavy disproportion by the world's poor. But for dogmatic insensitivity, few examples can match the righteous zeal of some activists for preventing America's poor from shopping at WalMart, for shutting the developing nations out of the global economy, or keeping genetically modified food out of the hands of literally starving Africans. A corollary widespread belief (Ridley quotes some prominent advocates) is that prosperity itself is the enemy of the planet and global salvation must necessarily entail global impoverishment--in effect, a lethal Malthusian population limit waiting to be imposed by environmental decree.

    Ridley avoids a pro or con position on global warming, but he's rightly wary of reacting in panic: the cost of overestimating GW could be much higher than underestimating: in his words, it's like stopping a nosebleed by putting a tourniquet around your neck. (It would be even more foolish in response to a predicted nosebleed.) But he didn't write this book to heap ridicule on doomsellers. He shows why they're always wrong: linear extrapolation from the present inevitably predicts a disastrous future--which is invariably wrong because it ignores the equally inevitable (but unpredictable) free market actions which future investors, entrepreneurs and inventors will take to sidestep the icebergs in the shipping lanes. Ideas "having sex" are far more nimble and productive than governments issuing prohibitions or doomsday prophets clamoring for an emergency reversal of course.

    (My note: only in inflexible dictatorships does mass civilian disaster arrive inexorably, as in Ukraine in the 1930s, China in the 1960s, North Korea today. In none of these regimes were (any) ideas allowed to "have sex". Unfortunately, just such a dictatorship will probably be necessary if the world decides to implement the Environmental Taliban's agenda to save us from planetary sacrilege.)

    "The Rational Optimist" is a wonderfully well-written counterpoint to the alarmist feel-bad prophecies (which will probably continue to outsell it) but it is not overtly political nor brimming with righteous denunciations. It is at least as rewarding as an insightful tract on human nature (and folly) and as much a call to reason as survey of contemporary intellectual hysteria and prejudice. I enjoyed reading it immensely, and unless you are allergic to bad news about the BAD NEWS, I think you will, too.

    5-0 out of 5 stars The Future is Rationally Bright, July 14, 2010
    Differentiation of individual activity, specialization and trade are the activities that have enabled humankind to overcome obstacles in the past and advance at a rapid pace. The future should be no different.

    According to Matt Ridley, trade was and is the essential element in human progress. He suggests that the first farmers were already traders and used their static location and accumulated inventory to meet hunter-gatherer demand. He also credits the farmer as the creator of property rights. Hunter-gatherer societies are egalitarian sharing the hunt and enforcing non-compliance. A farmer who plants a field expects to harvest it and store or trade the surplus. This, Ridley posits was the origin of private wealth.

    Ridley maintains that progress is dependent on idea sharing. As population density increases, the availability of new ideas and differentiation of occupation allows those with extra time to make use of these ideas.

    Twentieth century collectivist bias leads one to ask "who was in charge" looking for a central initiator of policy. Ridley suggests that the world is a complex adaptive system, where trade and progress emerged from the interaction of individuals. It was an evolutionary rather than a planned process.

    He recounts historical examples of institutional and industrial stagnation from the Bronze Age to British Rail and the U.S. Postal Service. What Ridley says they have in common is an attitude that rewards caution and discourages experiment. A planned economy requires perfect knowledge. The possibility of new knowledge makes a steady state or economic equilibrium model invalid.

    He says the Dark Ages were a massive back to the land hippie movement minus the trust funds, similarly the Maoist Cultural Revolution.

    Ridley thinks that governments tend to be good initially, but increasingly bad the longer they last. `Government brings inefficiency and stagnation to most things it runs.' Governments `employ ambitious elites who capture an increasingly greater share of the society's income by interfering in peoples lives and creating rules to enforce until they kill the goose that lays the golden eggs'

    African poverty, hunger, climate change, resource depletion, and disease are all challenges that an intellectually evolving human race will conquer.
    Individual creativity within a bottom-up political structure and a free-market economy will increase our individual wealth, health, and longevity according to Matt Ridley.

    5-0 out of 5 stars A Landmark and happily subversive book, May 26, 2010
    I can't do better that repeat Steven Pinker's endorsement from the dust jacket:
    " A delightful and fascinating book, filled with insight and wit, which will make you think twice and cheer up."

    It's also filled with historical insights into human psychological and social evolution from prehistory through the present day.

    This book is in fact the latest in a long line of lonely books explaining why spontaneous order (unconscious and unplanned) works so amazingly well, and bravely speaking out against the dominant pessimism that always reigns. Ridley cites these authors liberally: Adam Smith, Charles Darwin, Friedrich Hayek, Julian Simon, Bjorn Lomberg. Since all these men are heroes of mine, I needed little convincing. I am already a committed optimist.

    But a part of me is deeply pessimistic. That's because as always, the dominant view of the elites and the media everywhere is global pessimism. Political "leaders" everywhere believe the opposite of what this book teaches. And they mostly push for well intended but misguided policies that will guarantee that bad outcomes occur. John Holdren, Obama's chief science advisor, will not read this book, but he believes passionately the exact opposite of everything it explains.

    Matt Ridley understands all this, and his frustration with counterproductive policies (like Biofuels) is clearly stated. But the question is "Why are humans so intent on pessimism?" As someone fairly expert in evolutionary psychology, I was hoping Ridley would shed some light on this. A related question is "Why do humans prefer top down hierarchies to spontaneous order."

    My own hypothesis goes something like this:
    For hundreds of thousands of years, (and before trading occurred) our prehistoric ancestors evolved in small tribal bands, in desperate scarcity, and in constant total war with other tribes, deadly animals, and a harsh environment. In such a situation, a tribal band must operate with the discipline of a combat army. Survival was completely dependent on rigid conformity, obedience to authority, and the assumption that everything that moves is a potential threat motivated by conscious intent.

    Only in the last few hundred years have some civilizations allowed the spontaneous order of billions of individual decisions to generate far greater benefit than top down systems do. But our primitive past is so deeply imbedded in our mental genes, that most people still believe in gods, "great" leaders and/or socialism.

    My only other quibble with Ridley concerns his bias for markets but against financial markets which he sees as corrupt or exploitative. He is correct to see a difference, but he needs to read more Hayek to understand why. The answer is that financial markets are built on anti market foundations: fiat money printed by governments to serve political ends and price fixing of interest rates by central banks which loan money to banks at favored rates not given to others. This leads to markets distortions, mispriced risk, malinvestment, fraud and periodic bubbles.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Optimism is better than pessimism, July 22, 2010
    Wonderful to be regaled with positive things that humans have achieved and are capable of.
    We hear and see too much doom and gloom and sometimes I wonder if humans are programmed to be negative or are just fascinated with disaster and failure and predictions of the 'bad'.
    Good news does not seem to sell so I hope this wonderful book succeeds.
    Certainly has given me some insights which were in hindsight, intuitive, but of course without foresight, are generally not.
    it's a bit like saying, "yes we can"!
    Highly recommended.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Adam Smith Meets Charles Darwin, May 24, 2010

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    As the author states, this book is a fusion of the ideas of Adam Smith and Charles Darwin. Mankind is the only species that is able to build on the knowledge gained by our ancestors. This unending and logarithmic accumulation of knowledge has allowed us to specialize economically and our ideas and discoveries have 'mated' in an unending (albeit bumpy) stream of economic progress.

    Where Ray Kurzweil emphasizes technological progress in The Singularity Is Near: When Humans Transcend Biology, Ridley's approach is similar but stresses the economic and social progress enabled by the march of technology.

    Having witnessed decades of doomsayers myself, from Paul Ehrlich's in retrospect laughable Population Bomb, global cooling in the 70s, no-nukes hysteria, AIDs (which would supposedly kill millions in the U.S. alone), Y2K, 40 years of peak oil is imminent warnings, SARS etc and seen that these concerns bordering on hysteria were either outright misplaced or highly exaggerated, I appreciate the fact that Matt Ridley is able to put all this in perspective. In this regard, I think it especially important for younger people who have not yet lived through decades of pessimism and anti-development featuring one hysterical over-reaction after another that have ultimately proven inconsequential, to read this book.

    4-0 out of 5 stars Optimistic view on the global economy, not so optimistic about our future, July 6, 2010

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    Matt Ridley has written a very compelling theory about why we should be optimistic about our global economy, taking into account humans ability to learn and adapt from adversity. However, he does indicate that the adversity IS coming (global climate change, faltering markets, the end of the American Empire, etc.). He indicates that through knowledge and perseverance, we will get through it and potentially prosper from it through Green technologies, global economic investments, etc. So, while this book does not paint an optimistic future for humankind, it does make a good argument for the ways we can "take lemons and make lemonade" from the upcoming challenges we will face in this world. Ridley has done some interesting and insightful research into our history as a race, and how we have continually overcome the challenges we have faced...and how it's very likely that we can do it again. Given all of the books about the upcoming "doom and gloom" on Earth, this was a refreshing change of pace to read.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Fun, fascinating, controversial, July 18, 2010

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    The basic premises:

    (1) In the course of human history, people have lived increasingly prosperous, comfortable lives. This statement might seem surprising at first, but only because of the common tendency to paint the (unexperienced) past in rosy hues. On closer examination, the average inhabitant of a modern country lives a life kings of the past would envy.

    (2) The drive behind this ongoing improvement is trade, both of goods and ideas. Not charitable works or government regulation, necessary though those might both be in certain circumstances. No, people left to their own devices will find clever ways to solve pressing problems, bettering themselves, their customers, and often the world, in the process.

    (3) Given (1) and (2), the current climate of DOOM is not well-founded. Yes, we *might* be doomed, but there's no particular reason to assume that mankind can't handle whatever challenges lie ahead, using our rapidly-increasing capacity for idea exchange. However convincing current predictions of DOOM may be, there were equally convincing predictions in the past, and they all turned out to be wrong. Sure, there were occasional setbacks and issues, but overwhelmingly, life in the modern era has continued to rapidly improve, despite predictions of famine, plagues, ice ages, over-population, killer air pollution, acid rain, and much more.

    For me, the most fascinating parts of the book were about ancient prehistory of trade, and various historical trends and developments. Less interesting, though more controversial, are the later chapters about modern issues like global warming and poverty in Africa. Though they're important topics, they're still largely theoretical on all sides. No one knows how bad climate change will be, or what we will wind up doing about it. No one knows yet if/when/how Africa will attain prosperity. I'm more interested in facts than debate, though I realize the current-event chapters will get all the talk at cocktail parties.

    The only real weakness I perceived were the vague, unnecessarily inflammatory potshots taken at archetypes Ridley sees as enemies of trade: kings, priests, financiers, taxmen, monopolies, bureaucrats. Whenever historical economic progress foundered, these generic targets get the blame, without much real explanation.

    I've heard criticism that Ridley is unreservedly opposed to governments and regulation, but that was not my impression. I came away with the feeling that the right kind of government was absolutely necessary to prosperity, not no government at all. He criticizes places like the USSR, modern-day North Korea, and 1800s Japan, while pointing out Botswana and Silicon Valley as places doing it right.

    Overall, this is a fun, fascinating book to read. Essential, IMO, for anyone who wants to discuss current events in a balanced way. Whatever your stance, be prepared to have your own nose tweaked a bit, as Ridley is generous with his snark.

    Highly recommended.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Rational Optimist, July 16, 2010
    The world's innovation rate makes us all Luddites! Mat Ridley gives perspectives on understanding the current ferociously changing times. He is the recipe for overcomming vogueish Malthusian 'end of the world' 'expert' views (ie. static vs dynamic). A terrific read - especially comments regarding evolutionary links to free trade, Botswanna and global warming. Great historical examples of both wealth creation/destruction. I submit to his "Name a Phoenician emperor" taunt!

    4-0 out of 5 stars Good writing; Devastating Case for Things Looking Up, June 9, 2010
    An extended argument that human intelligence and the well-being it allows is created, collected, maintained, distributed and extended by trade. Trade is "ideas having sex." Ridley builds his case with point after point then examines all the usual counterexamples and objections, taking them out one by one. It's a wonderful book. Of course it helped that he was preaching to the choir with me. What's most delightful is Ridley's goodhearted skewering of pessimists -- the technological and environmentalist Jeremiahs in particular -- with the most obvious of weaknesses is their flimsy cases. He's almost embarrassed for them. Ridley is a bit repetitive at times, but maintains a wry humor and lighthearted tone throughout, which makes his writing all the more effective. He's a good writer and he's right about everything. ... Read more


    9. The World Is Flat 3.0: A Brief History of the Twenty-first Century
    by Thomas L. Friedman
    Paperback
    list price: $16.00 -- our price: $10.88
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0312425074
    Publisher: Picador
    Sales Rank: 1816
    Average Customer Review: 3.8 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    A New Edition of the Phenomenal #1 Bestseller

    "One mark of a great book is that it makes you see things in a new way, and Mr. Friedman certainly succeeds in that goal," the Nobel laureate Joseph E. Stiglitz wrote in The New York Times reviewing The World Is Flat in 2005. In this new edition, Thomas L. Friedman includes fresh stories and insights to help us understand the flattening of the world. Weaving new information into his overall thesis, and answering the questions he has been most frequently asked by parents across the country, this third edition also includes two new chapters--on how to be a political activist and social entrepreneur in a flat world; and on the more troubling question of how to manage our reputations and privacy in a world where we are all becoming publishers and public figures.

    The World Is Flat 3.0 is an essential update on globalization, its opportunities for individual empowerment, its achievements at lifting millions out of poverty, and its drawbacks--environmental, social, and political, powerfully illuminated by the Pulitzer Prize--winning author of The Lexus and the Olive Tree.
    ... Read more

    Reviews

    4-0 out of 5 stars Competing in a shrinking world, April 5, 2005
    I'd forgotten the pleasure reading good prose brings. Friedman not only writes well, but does so on an important subject- globalization. He states, "It is now possible for more people than ever to collaborate and compete in real time with more people on more different kinds of work from more different corners of the planet and on a more equal footing than at any previous time in the history of the world."

    He claims, "When the world is flat, you can innovate without having to emigrate". But, how did the world `become flat'? Friedman suggest the trigger events were the collapse of communism, the dot-com bubble resulting in overinvestment in fiber-optic telecommunications, and the subsequent out-sourcing of engineers enlisted to fix the perceived Y2K problem.

    Those events created an environment where products, services, and labor are cheaper. However, the West is now losing its strong-hold on economic dominance. Depending on if viewed from the eyes of a consumer or a producer - that's either good or bad, or a combination of both.

    What is more sobering is Friedman's elaboration on Bill Gates' statement, "When I compare our high schools to what I see when I'm traveling abroad, I am terrified for our work force of tomorrow. In math and science, our fourth graders are among the top students in the world. By eighth grade, they're in the middle of the pack. By 12th grade, U.S. students are scoring near the bottom of all industrialized nations. . . . The percentage of a population with a college degree is important, but so are sheer numbers. In 2001, India graduated almost a million more students from college than the United States did. China graduates twice as many students with bachelor's degrees as the U.S., and they have six times as many graduates majoring in engineering. In the international competition to have the biggest and best supply of knowledge workers, America is falling behind."

    Friedman sounds the alarm with a call for diligence and fortitude - academically, politically, and economically. He sees a dangerous complacency, from Washington down through the public school system. Students are no longer motivated. "In China today, Bill Gates is Britney Spears. In America today, Britney Spears is Britney Spears -- and that is our problem."

    Questions I wish Friedman had explored in further detail are:

    1. When should countries do what benefits the global economy, and when should they look out for their own interests? (protectionism, tariffs, quotas, etc.)
    2. What will a `flat world' mean to the world's poor? (those living in Haiti, Angola, Kazakhstan, etc.)
    3. What cultural values (or absence thereof) are contributing to the West's loss of productivity, education, and excellence? (morality, truth, religion, meaning, hope?)
    4. How will further globalization effect cultural distinctions? (Are we heading towards a universal melting pot?)
    5. What will a `flat world' mean environmentally - particularly for those countries on the verge of an economic explosion?

    1-0 out of 5 stars Well-written but based on an oversimplified and factually inaccurate premise, August 15, 2005
    An enlightening essay on the nature of the business world and how the global interconnectedness and outsourcing has leveled the playing field. Completely wrong, and based on an oversimplified and factually inaccurate premise, but well-written and enlightening. In Friedman's "flat" world, it's possible for a call center in India to take orders which then get processed by a shipping service in Indiana which forwards the order to a warehouse in Oakland that stores merchandise made from parts made in Taiwan and assembled in Malaysia. All this is written in such a way as to make the Corporate Executives of the world look like the good guys for somehow coming up with a win-win scenario whereby they bring jobs to third-world countries, at the same time saving themselves money while increasing their productivity and efficiency - a fine premise in the ideal, but hopelessly impractical on several realistic human levels.

    The book is very well-written, but Friedman fails to take into account the realities surrounding the fact that in order for such a system to work with any kind of sustainability it needs to create jobs to replace the ones that have been outsourced. Friedman's answer to this is that creativity and inventiveness will take the place of the grunt-work that's been outsourced, an idea that looks good on paper but fails to consider that our society's most financially successful businesses have never invented or innovated anything, instead relying on finding new ways to produce an existing product in a way that's cheaper and faster than their nearest competitor - thus fostering an environment that's not very conducive to innovation. The developers of new technology rarely if ever are the ones to reap the majority of financial benefit from its sale. One cannot, therefore, draw any sort of connection whatsoever from the outsourcing of jobs to the creation of new ones through innovation. If anything, the opposite is true.

    Friedman also fails to mention some fairly major flaws in human nature, including things like greed, laziness, and the tendency to make decisions based on emotion and loyalty rather than logic or practicality. There's also this pesky need for workers to continue to be able to support their families on ever-decreasing wages; the need to eat sort of gets in the way of his nice, neat little theory of how wonderfully global the new technology is. In Friedman's ideal world, the world's CEO's would all outsource their labor to countries where labor is cheaper and use the money they saved to create better, higher-paying jobs for all those displaced workers here stateside. Meanwhile, the third world countries would all use their new income from the influx of manufacturing jobs to improve their own standard of living. But this is oversimplified to the point of being absurd -- the CEO's are outsourcing their labor and pocketing the savings while they lay off the workers. The workers aren't going back to school to learn new, higher-paying careers (a Welder's not going to necessarily be able to go back and get a degree in Software Engineering just because that's what jobs are available anyway because he can't afford to go back and be a full-time student for 4 years while he's trying to support his family. The CEO's aren't paying for the re-education of their displaced workforce, instead they're buying homes in the Caribbean and outsourcing their HQ to the Cayman Islands so they don't have to pay taxes. Meanwhile, those third world countries are experiencing no recognizable increase in their standard of living, and they won't anytime soon -- the reason labor is so cheap in those countries is because their governments don't require employers to pay health benefits or any other kind of benefits. If employers paid for their employees to have a higher standard of living, the cost of doing business would increase no matter what country they're in. And since the sole reason corporations are outsourcing is to lower the overhead by using cheap labor, it doesn't make any sense for them to increase their cost of labor by paying for the same things they're required to pay for with American workers. Heck, we can't even get Wal-mart to pay worker's health benefits in this country, how can we expect them to pay for any such benefits in their cheap labor abroad. Really the only winners in this mess are the guys in the top echelons of the corporations, for whose often-unethical policies toward workers Mr. Friedman seems to come across more an apologist than an objective journalist.

    Also, I've never heard anyone mention Bill Gates so many times and in such favorable terms in the course of a book on global economics; according to Friedman's revisionist version, it was Gates who invented the personal computer; Windows was the first and only user-friendly operating system according to this author. Case in point: there is a passage in the book that alludes to Microsoft's far-reaching vision regarding the internet and e-commerce. The truth is, Microsoft was caught completely off guard by the advancement of the Internet - Windows 3.0 had very little built-in networking capability; they had to release a special version called Windows for Workgroups when it was discovered that networks were starting to become status quo; The first release of Windows 95 had no built-in internet connectivity, and no web browser was included until Netscape came along, at which point Microsoft had to hurry up and figure out how to make their operating system work on the internet. Gates was even on record back then as saying that he didn't think the internet would ever really amount to much as far as how it would affect the way people used computers. But according to Friedman, Bill Gates was a far-reaching visionary who singlehandedly created the internet, e-commerce, and everything else we take for granted today. That should give you some idea as to the factual inaccuracies that permeate the book. For a more accurate background on the history of computers and the Internet, readers should buy a copy of In The Beginning Was The Command Line, by Neal Stephenson.

    Near the end of the book, Friedman plays the 9/11 card. In a moment of wild speculation, he actually blames the terrorist attacks on the fact that the terrorists were from poor countries and were jealous of the prosperity that the Western World has had through globalization, and he puts forth the theory that if these people had had a McDonalds in their town and a couple of factories making Gap clothing, they wouldn't've become terrorists. Except that most of the terrorists were from Saudi Arabia, one of the richest countries in the world, a country that practically has a stranglehold on the world's corporate economy already. The terrorist attacks of 9/11 had nothing to do with corporate globalization and everything to do with the past 20 years of US foreign policy in the middle east. But hooray for us, we've got globalization, and if those poor terrorists over there had globalization too, maybe they wouldn't be terrorists. Puh-lease.

    I have heard it said by others that Friedman's book looks at the overall "big picture" of globalization and not the individual details. However, as the saying goes, "the devil is in the details." Friedman's extoling of the virtues of globalization fails to take into account several key factors which, when considered, paint the globalization picture in an entirely different light. Clearly Friedman's vision of a flat earth won't come true until we solve the paradox of how to make humans into a race of mindless, overachieving, underpaid automatons who still somehow manage to think creatively enough to constantly invent enough new technology to create new jobs at the same rate as the old jobs are being outsourced.

    1-0 out of 5 stars Why should we read this?, September 17, 2005
    Tom Friedman is a well connected journalist. His columns appear on the op-ed pages of the New York Times and his previous works LONGITUDES AND ATTITUDES and THE LEXUS AND THE OLIVE TREE are part of the "conventional wisdom" of most American decision makers. This new book, THE WORLD IS FLAT will also find its way into the "conventional wisdom." Unfortunately, it is at best a misdiagnosis of the factors that have lead to the ability to substitute labor across geographical boundaries. However, although it is as wrong as could be, many of our power elites will read or hear of this, and will base their decisions on the assumption that this book contains the truth. The reason that you should read it is that it is conventional wisdom and you are perhaps better off understanding this and how it is wrong.

    Friedman's explanation is a simple one - the world has transformed from a three dimensional phenomenon, a sphere, to a two dimensional flat plane where there are no entry barriers into the labor market. So, a radiologist in Boston can be easily substituted for a radiologist in Bangalore. Oh, how it would be nice if it were this simple. But alas it is not. Friedman, I believe, is well intentioned, but he mistakenly believes that he can find the truth through anecdotes. So, his empirical evidence comes from stories of things that he does not understand instead of the use of reliable demographic and economic databases.

    He believes that 10 exogenous forces can explain how "the world became flat." While doing this, he solely looks at the labor market and ignores the effects of the consumer, monetary, raw material/energy, and fixed investment markets. He cannot distinguish between a symptom and a cause. These 10 forces that he claims changed the labor markets are not causes but merely symptoms.

    Friedman is a name dropper par excellence, and rubs elbows with the elite. Unfortunately for him, he cannot detect competence or incompetence. One reason that this book will not age well is that when he wrote it in 2004 he was rubbing elbows with the incompetent elites such as Carly Fiorina who botched the merger between Compaq and Hewlett Packard and Nobuyuki Idei, the incompetent chairman of Sony. He praises these folks to win their favor, but reading this in 2005, demonstrates how little he knows.

    A major problem that Friedman ignores is the inability of any government to impartially referee our global economy. No country has good corporate governance laws, and the US is becoming increasing unable to protect both intellectual and physical property rights. This problem creates new barriers and instead of flattening the world, it adds new walls and new traps. Poor corporate governance promotes crony capitalism and not the meritocracy capitalism that Friedman thinks it is supporting. Just look at the disconnect between executive pay and performance as evidence that many incompetent corporate chieftains are keeping their jobs and continuing to make poor decisions. American law is ineffective, the inability to sentence Health South's Scrushy shows that Sarbanes Oxley is not working, and the inability to put Ken Lay, Michael Eisner, and Michael Ovitz in prison shows how little protection the share holders have. Things are worse in China, India, and Japan where "transparency" is not even a part of the vocabulary.

    The book is filled with inconsistency. It derides the inflexibility of the European welfare state, but calls for an American safety net to protect those from globalization. He calls for the enactment of "Hillary care" but cannot explain the reason that it failed passage in 1993. He praise the Asian "rote learning" systems, but later on calls on American youth to think unconventionally. He is calling on the federal government to do contradictory things such as keep minimum wages and promote market efficiency.

    America's increasing indebtedness is not given one sentence in this book. Not only are jobs being exported to Southeast Asia, but claims and control on American assets are also being transferred. Increasingly, the important capital allocations in America will be directed by foreign executives who will be even less accountable than the Bernie Ebbers and the Ken Lays.

    In short, Friedman is not qualified to write on this topic, but like the incompetent overpaid executive that he hangs with, he will be over paid and over read. At best, we might be able to profit if we understand how this "conventional wisdom" is wrong and then short sell the companies whose leaders make bad decisions based on this wrong analysis.

    3-0 out of 5 stars Leveled by flatness, April 22, 2005


    From the first few pages when Friedman leaps from level playing fields to a flat world, it is almost easy to understand why the cover shows ships falling off the edge of an un-flat world [NOTE: The current dust cover, changed since this review was written, no longer depicts ships falling off a 'flat' earth. You can draw your own conclusions as to the motives behind that decision.]. Something is missing here. "Level" is not "flat". And ships don't fall off a flat surface. Is he trying to be ironic? If so, Friedman ought to leave that to P.J. O'Rourke. If he thinks a "brief history" of the past five years is a funny concept, again I refer you to O'Rourke for more robust and pointed humor.

    As a journalist, with seemingly unlimited resources and the once-gilded New York Times brand name behind him, Friedman has leveraged his basic skills into best-sellerdom, all the while seemingly in shock and awe of all the things his rich travel budget allows him to take in. Yet I have to ask, where's the beef?

    Yes, the world has shifted from networks based on mythology and monarchies, through manufacturing and Marxism, to today's global marketing, but services aren't a new phenomenon; they've always been with us. And although wireless communication has made the world faster and more competitive, life is no more ruthless, violent or uncertain now than when plagues, expansive military conquest, disease, poor hygiene, inbred monarchies, and wealth-by-acquisition ruled the world as they have for most of human existence. Sure, technology has increased the pace, but each generation seems to think that the last generation had it slow and easy, and that has never been the case. The poor villager who wandered too far away from his hut 1,500 years ago experienced no less a shock than today's global traveler stepping off a plane in Mumbai.

    And this outsourcing 'problem' is not new and it is not based simply on information technology. For as long as man has tried to better his life and to leverage his advantages, he has hired someone else to produce the things he needs, be it food, cooking, child care, or production. Like services, outsourcing is not new. That villager from 1,500 years ago thought that outsourcing crop production to the next village over was no less daunting or distant than Americans importing oranges from Israel or roses from Brazil. And you can bet the other villagers were mad as hell at him for taking away 'their' work.

    For more than fifty years, columnists, pundits, journalists, armchair analysts, and bad economists have been intrigued by each new emerging economic superpower, from the Soviet Union, to the European Union, to Japan, to China, and now India, and each time all that wonderment and starry-eyed predictions have come to nothing. Like Ayn Rand said, what separates America from the rest of the world is that we were the first to think of making money, not just taking money. And America still does that very well. I still have my doubts about the sustainability of growth in China and India. Sooner or later they are going to hit a consumer-oriented economy and demands for many things their people don't demand today. Besides, their growth has been exaggerated by the fact that they started basically at zero. Bad analysts like straight-line extrapolations. Not only do these growth lines sometimes flatten out, they can nose dive. And what's bigger and more dramatic, 3% growth in a $11 trillion economy or 7% in a $200 million economy?

    Maybe the world has become more homogenous with technology and communications. But anyone who thinks that there is some huge melting pot, in America or around the world, would be better served by recognizing the world as a salad bowl, not a melting pot. And neither the pot or bowl are flat.

    3-0 out of 5 stars The Prose is Flat, November 8, 2005
    I can't honestly agree with the gentleman who feels that this book was a reminder of how enjoyable good prose can be. This book has to have one of the most annoying styles I've ever suffered through. It seems to be written with a blend of "hey, look at me! look how clever and funny I am!", IT company advertising over-optimism of how well all the telecommunications technologies work and how they're going to change everything that ever existed in the world -so you better get ready-, and "look at how many CEO's I've had lunch with!"

    Needless to say, it gets tiresome fast. By page 160 I wanted the author to just get to his point (which was overly repeated), and to leave all the attitude and overbearing style out of it. I usually read a book this size in about a week. After taking a month to get to page 200 I had to put it down for two weeks since I couldn't take anymore sentences like: "Now more people will be able to plug and play to get in touch with more people, more machines, more businesses, to share more data, more information, more stock quotes, more pornography, more whatever, at anywhere, at anytime, from anyplace, than ever before in the history of the world, thanks to digitization, virtualization, blah, blah, blah . . . " The above sentence would be fine as the last sentence of a chapter. Instead it's EVERY sentence in the whole book! Once I randomly flipped to one page and counted 11 uses of the word "any", and 3 rambling lists of "stuff" in a category instead of just mentioning that category. For example instead of saying "you could work from anywhere" the author feels compelled to say something like "you could work from the home, the beach house, the hotel, the mall, the park, on your way to the airport, the bullet train rushing past Mt. Fuji, blah, blah, blah, look at how many cool / cutesy places I can name! Did I mention I had lunch with a CEO, and that I discovered the world was flat? Let me do so again on THIS page in case you forgot from when I told you in the last paragraph already."

    OK, now that I have that off my chest . . .

    This book started out with a 5 star rating because it is a book about a very interesting and important topic, namely the way telecommunications / supply chain management / etc. are changing how business is being done (economic barriers of entry and importance of geographic location are being eliminated essentially) and how this affects the rest of the world. It loses a star for the fact that reading this book is a tremendous chore for the reasons outlined above. It loses another star for the fact that the author clearly talked only to CEO's and founders of the telecom companies, and not the engineers on the front lines using the software products he's talking about. As an engineer with a company mentioned in the book I have first hand, personal experience that some of the rosy picture he paints about how well the flat world works simply isn't true. Even with all the "steroids" and "flatteners" he talks about, the bottom line improvement in productivity just isn't as great as the CEO's who make the software will rave about in order to promote their product. In fact, when design teams become so outsourced all over the world, and so divorced from manufacturing you have the potential of wasting a lot of money instead of saving it. When IT as a business fad goes too far -and management loses sight of what they're really supposed to be doing instead of running with the let's have more IT herd- you end up with smart, highly paid people across the nation, if not the world, making and sending to each other powerpoint charts about a product / service they no longer have any real contact with or knowledge of.

    Also be warned there's some significant, and slightly hypocritical at points, Bush and Republican bashing.

    I'd cautiously recommend this book, but only for people who can put up with a LOT of attitude, and some political bias.

    2-0 out of 5 stars A technological lovefest, sometimes thin, sometimes sloppy, sometimes interesting, October 26, 2006
    Friedman here explains how the development of various new technologies has made the world "flat." The exact meaning of this metaphor is somewhat elusive (it usually seems to mean the cost of doing work far away is lower; I guess "the world is small" seems clich�d). Friedman loves his metaphor: as the reviewer in The Economist (31 March 2005) put it, he "shows his readers no mercy, proceeding to flog this inaccurate and empty image to death over hundreds of pages."

    Okay, enough on the metaphor. What about the content? The first half of the book tells how various technological advances (such as the world wide web, better supply chains, outsourcing, "insourcing," and much more) have lowered the cost of doing work and sharing information all over the world. I largely enjoyed this section. Friedman gives an interesting history of these technologies, and while he relies almost entirely on interview and anecdotal evidence, he provides enough of those that you start to believe him.

    The second half of the book is full of advice for EVERYONE. Friedman has tips for young people getting an education, for U.S. companies, for the U.S. as a whole, for the developing world, for the Arab world. This part is spread pretty thin: the evidence on which he relies for one observation is the dinner commentary of his daughter's college roommate's graduate student boyfriend. Nice. In the midst of it all, I concede that he presents some interesting ideas.

    Parts of the book feel sloppy, especially those parts dealing with the developing world. At one point, he says that "now ...almost every country has acquired a McDonald's except the worst rogues like North Korea [and] Iran." Actually, out of Sub-Saharan Africa's 48 nations, a total of 2 have a McDonald's. At another point, he quotes someone working in Mali as saying, "Apparently, everyone in Mali uses Linux." Wait, you mean everyone of the 1 in every 167 Malians who have any access to the internet uses Linux? Nice. (And that's not getting into the strange suggestion that developing countries should have a club modeled after AA called Developing Countries Anonymous.) Friedman has a few throw-away passages claiming that he knows that not everyone has access to these technologies, but he ignores the fact that his is a history of a small portion of the world.

    Sloppiness aside, Friedman is refreshingly non-partisan. He also clearly put significant work into the Updated and Expanded edition. Unfortunately, the book feels way too long.

    The Metacritic website, which aggregated the opinions of 22 reviewers from major publications (from The Nation to The Economist to The New York Times), gave the original release of Friedman's book a 53/100, so about half of reviewers liked the book. So if you want to learn about globalization and you're not an economist, what are your alternatives? An illuminating quote from The Economist's review: "A number of truly enlightening books have been published recently which not only support globalisation, but answer its critics and explain its complexities to the general reader--most notably Jagdish Bhagwati's `In Defence of Globalisation' and Martin Wolf's `Why Globalisation Works'... Anyone tempted to buy "The World is Flat" should hold back, and purchase instead Mr Bhagwati's book or Mr Wolf's."

    4-0 out of 5 stars Massive Op-Ed, Some Food for Thought, Not a Full Meal, April 11, 2005
    Edit of 20 Dec 07 to add links.

    I confess to being mildly disappointed whenever I encounter a massive Op-Ed without references, and can see in every page ideas that are undoubtedly the author's own, but have also been very ably explored by others--Kevin Kelly in Out of Control: The New Biology of Machines, Social Systems, & the Economic World; Thomas Stewart, The Wealth of Knowledge: Intellectual Capital and the Twenty-first Century Organization; or Howard Rheingold, Smart Mobs: The Next Social Revolution, to name just three of hundreds of bleeding edge sources.

    The core idea in this book, that individuals are now empowered and able to practice "C2C" (consumer to consumer or citizen to citizen), is not new. Most of us have been focusing on it since the mid-1990's when we started to tell the Pentagon that top-down command and control based on secret sources and unilateral action was history, being replaced by multilateral bottom up consesus based on open sources.

    The heart of the book, the discussion of ten forces that flattened the world (basically, inter-connected the world in a manner unlike any seen before), makes it a solid airplane book, a fine way to spend a few hours.

    The following sentence, on page 283, is alone worth the price of the book: "If President Bush made energy independence his moon shot, in one fell sweeop he would dry up revenue for terrorism, force Iran, Russia, Venezuela, and Saudi Arabia onto the path of reform--which they will never do with $50-a-barrel oil--strengthen the dollar, and improve his own standing in Europe by doing something huge to reduce global warming."

    The book provides a good overview of the economic and intellectual challenges from China and India, and makes this memorable by jumping from "eat your dinner and think of the starving children in India" to "do your job well, or lose it to smarter more motivated young men and women from India."

    Other more intellectually rigorous books (added 20 Dec 07):
    Modern Strategy
    The Unconquerable World: Power, Nonviolence, and the Will of the People
    The Fifty-Year Wound: How America's Cold War Victory Has Shaped Our World
    The Fortune at the Bottom of the Pyramid: Eradicating Poverty Through Profits (Wharton School Publishing Paperbacks)
    The Wealth of Networks: How Social Production Transforms Markets and Freedom

    5-0 out of 5 stars Rounding Out Your Right-Brain in a Flattening World, March 3, 2008
    Our world has come a long way, not just since the proverbial "beginning of time," but in the last 20, 10, 5 and even 3 years since this book was first published. In "The World is Flat," Thomas Friedman very consciensiously and enthusiastically paints a picture of the detailed landscape of the current world through the eyes of business, technology, cultural and social development. I have traditionally found the topics of globalization, outsourcing and economics dry and rather boring, but the author brings them to life and makes them relevant to each of our lives in a way that is truly captivating. There are countless examples of this in the book, from the impact of the usage of the personal computer to a creative lemonade salesman at a baseball game to Big Macs vs. pizza.

    This book filled me with ideas, thoughts and concepts that I had never before imagined and I came away excited about the possibilities that exist in my own hands. I was really struck by the conversation about the urgent value for Americans to exercise their right brain: to do what you love, to invent, create, relate, express, empathize. The point Friedman emphasizes is: "Now that foreigners can do left-brain work cheaper, we in the U.S. must do right-brain work better." This idea made me think of two other authors, Ariel & Shya Kane, who have had a huge effect on how I relate to my life and approach my personal well-being, and whose books also introduced concepts that also completely blew my mind.

    The Kanes' technology of Instantaneous Transformation, the phenomenon that occurs when you are truly present and directly engaged in your life and causes problems, stress, worry & fear to dissolve, is another contributor to the flattening of the world. They address the gap between the things that we do, learn and know and what it means to truly 'be': certainly a skill unique to each person in the world. If you enjoy "The World is Flat," check out the Kanes' books, Being Here: Modern Day Tales of Enlightenment and How To Create a Magical Relationship. I HIGHLY recommend them all!

    1-0 out of 5 stars Chronicler of the Obvious, December 15, 2005
    I tried to hop on the bandwagon for loving this book, I really tried. However, as each longwinded chapter unfolded more and more evidence presented itself as proof that this book is all filler. It reads like the publisher paid by the word alone. The author is not, it's worth saying again, is not brilliant with prose as other reviewers have stated. In fact there are more than a few poor choices of words and awkward phrases that ask the reader to give credit to Friedman with out question (obey the literati crown I wear I can see him yelling) even though the verbiage is clunky and aimless. But I digress from the subject of this review. The book simply states, over and over and over again, that Indians are doing well in IT and this probably won't change anytime soon. There. That's it. No kidding. Its several hundred pages of waiting for Friedman to get to his tired punch line something like '...and the [accounting, customer service, help desk, IT department etc] job you thought was in your home town was actually being done in India!' If you've got a job, if you listen to decent news (NPR, BBC), or at least read the paper once in a blue moon you've already discovered that outsourcing is big time these days. If you want to listen to Friedman drop the names of his famous cronies , rant like a stoned Harvard poly-sci major about the success of India's IT industry being a communist plot, and repeat over and over that Indians do a lot of outsourcing work for the US companies this book is for you.

    3-0 out of 5 stars Thought provoking but far from the level of academic rigor that I would have expected from such a big name at the NYT, December 17, 2005
    Thought provoking but could have been shortened to 1/3 the size. Examples started off interesting but later became redundant and rather tedious. He is certainly well connected , well travelled and well informed but it is almost as if Mr. Friedman wants us to know this about him- unfortunately, it can be perceived as slightly arrogant and the tone of the book smacks of smug narcissism. This may not have been his intent but I imagine that some readers could project these qualities onto the book. If you are looking for critical analysis- it is not here- this is a quick read, providing a superficial view of globalization- can be conceived of as a wonderful introductory text but unsatisfying in that there is no critical analysis or scholarly consideration of opposing view points. I believe this book is required reading for those interested in understanding one prespective on global change but I hope someone comes out with a more deeply analytic, critical exploration of the forces altering our world. ... Read more


    10. What Technology Wants
    by Kevin Kelly
    Hardcover
    list price: $27.95 -- our price: $16.31
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0670022152
    Publisher: Viking Adult
    Sales Rank: 1293
    Average Customer Review: 4.5 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    A refreshing view of technology as a living force in the world.

    This provocative book introduces a brand-new view of technology. It suggests that technology as a whole is not a jumble of wires and metal but a living, evolving organism that has its own unconscious needs and tendencies. Kevin Kelly looks out through the eyes of this global technological system to discover "what it wants." He uses vivid examples from the past to trace technology's long course and then follows a dozen trajectories of technology into the near future to project where technology is headed. This new theory of technology offers three practical lessons: By listening to what technology wants we can better prepare ourselves and our children for the inevitable technologies to come. By adopting the principles of pro-action and engagement, we can steer technologies into their best roles. And by aligning ourselves with the long-term imperatives of this near-living system, we can capture its full gifts. Written in intelligent and accessible language, this is a fascinating, innovative, and optimistic look at how humanity and technology join to produce increasing opportunities in the world and how technology can give our lives greater meaning.
    ... Read more

    Reviews

    5-0 out of 5 stars A fascinating look at how technology evolves, October 14, 2010
    WHAT TECHNOLOGY WANTS offers a highly readable investigation into the mechanisms by which technology advances over time. The central thesis of the book is that technology grows and evolves in much the same way as an autonomous, living organism.

    The book draws many parallels between technical progress and biology, labeling technology as "evolution accelerated." Kelly goes further and argues that neither evolution nor technological advance result from a random drift but instead have an inherent direction that makes some outcomes virtually inevitable. Examples of this inevitability include the eye, which evolved independently at least six times in different branches of the animal kingdom, and numerous instances of technical innovations or scientific discoveries being made almost simultaneously.

    Kelly believes that technological progress has a symbiotic relationship with human population growth: technology makes increased population possible, while also relying on it to create both new minds that can be applied to further innovation and new consumers for those innovations. The book suggests that population is likely to peak and perhaps decline as global living standards rise and women choose to have fewer children, and it offers a number of possible scenarios under which it may be possible to decouple future progress from population growth.

    One of the most interesting chapters delves into the possible dystopian side of advancing technology. The book quotes at length from Theodore Kaczynski's "Unibomber Manifesto." Kelly is willing to acknowledge the obvious logic of many of Kaczynski's arguments, even as he bemoans the fact that some of the most "astute analyses" of these issues comes from a mentally unbalanced murderer. Kelly rejects Kaczynski's pessimistic belief that technology destroys freedom, arguing instead that technology should make it possible for us to make better decisions.

    The book offers a list of ten universal tendencies that give technology direction. Interestingly, one item on this list is "sentience." Kelly believes that some forms of artificial intelligence are inevitable and suggests that AI may be likely to evolve out of the internet.

    I found it somewhat surprising that the book does not include more on the broad economic implications of progress. The technologies that Kelly describes -- especially artificial intelligence -- are certain to have a dramatic impact on employment markets, the concentration of income and wealth, and perhaps the overall structure of the economy. For an in depth look at these issues, I would highly recommend this book:

    The Lights in the Tunnel: Automation, Accelerating Technology and the Economy of the Future

    "What Technology Wants" argues for a broad definition of technology that includes the arts, culture and social institutions. "The Lights in the Tunnel" makes an essentially similar argument that the structure of our economy also needs to be considered technology and will need to evolve as progress continues. Both books offer strong evidence that technology is likely to continue advancing exponentially for the foreseeable future, and both should be read by anyone who wants to gain insight into the likely impact of that incredible degree of progress on society and the economy.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Brilliant, October 25, 2010
    I admire this book, the brilliance of which defies easy summary. It stands out for its courage, honesty, and the depth of its convictions. One of the best books I have read this year.

    Roughly, this is a book about where our technology (or technium), if it can be considered autonomous, wants to go. The subtext is an lasting inquiry into whether, roughly, technology makes people happy or not. As such I'd consider it in a dialogue with writers like Thoreau and Edward Abbey, and more recent books like Shop Class as Soulcraft, Into the Wild, and Zen and the Art of Motorcycle Maintenance.

    By profession I read a lot of tech books, from academia to business press and among them Kelly's book truly stands out. There are a few reasons. First, Kelly is just writing at a much deeper level than most authors have the courage to tackle. Most tech writers allow their natural optimism or pessimism to remain unexamined; For Kelly that is the topic itself, and it is refreshing. Compared with Kelly's book, many other books feel unbearably superficial (even perhaps my own!)

    Second, Kelly writes from a level or deep personal experience which makes all the difference. This isn't about trite anecdotes or reporting, but rather the experience of a man who has tried living like the Unabomber at least for periods of his life. Basically, he has tried life with lots of tech, with little, and in between. He has, therefore, convictions from that experience that feel deep and genuine.

    Third, Kelly has a natural, easy prose and an honesty in his voice which carries through every paragraph. It is extremely hard to write on abstract topics like the existence of a technium without quickly becoming technical or very confusing. For me at least, the book was a page-turner, which you expect from narrative but not from philosophy.

    Highly recommended.

    Tim Wu

    3-0 out of 5 stars Technology wants goodness?, November 19, 2010
    There is much in this book that is thought-provoking and interesting, and there are no regrets for having invested the time and effort in reading it. While the book is not a difficult read - Mr. Kelly's prose is clear and pleasing - it is a challenging read in that it requires an occasional pause to fully consider what exactly is being proposed in the author's seductive writing style. It is hard not to admire the author's deep knowledge of and passion for the subject, but reasonable people will disagree as to the content.

    First, the positives. There are excellent overviews of the historical development of science as well as the concept of convergence that recurs in scientific and technological development (and also, as the author points out, in film-making). The case for considering technology as a self-perpetuating organism is forcefully made, and examples of parallels between evolutionary development and technological development are treated in depth.

    There is also a helpful discussion about man's relationship to technology, covered in three chapters collectively called Choices. Here Mr. Kelly views the perspective of the Unabomber, the Amish, and a proposed contemporary search for a convivial relationship. As odd as it sounds to use the Unabomber as a lens through which to view technology, it is extremely powerful. The obvious point is that it is quite unthinkable to live without technology, so that finding a personal balance with it should be the goal (preferably one that does not include bombs - either mail-bombs or the nuclear variety).

    Second, the controversies. If I correctly interpreted what Mr. Kelly has to say about technology, it is something like this: technology (or his word, technium) is the sum total of man's progress, or "8,000 years of embedded human knowledge" and that it includes all the progress man has made (resulting in extended life spans, creation of leisure, etc.). Because this technium is "an outgrowth of the human mind" it is an extension of life itself. Further, this technium has reached such an advanced stage that it has now developed into an independent organism.

    From there Mr. Kelly stretches for his ultimate conclusion, "the technium expands life's fundamental traits, and in doing so it expands life's fundamental goodness." What does technology want? Goodness, apparently. Technology is postured as some benevolent god, created by man in man's own image (which is an idea that should be terrifying).

    For technology geeks and techie true believers I can understand how this book could rate five stars. Mr. Kelly is a compelling evangelist for technology. But as for the rest of us, while we acknowledge technology's benefits, we probably have already made our peace with technology at less than unqualified love (perhaps a "love-wariness" relationship?). Looking back to the editorial review on the product page, the book is described as a "visceral" expression, and that is absolutely correct. This book contains Mr. Kelly's personal, inward feelings on technology, not, despite the trappings, a consciously scientific study of the subject.

    Read this book and enjoy this book, but be prepared to occasionally shake your head and say, "Really? He can't possibly believe that." Technology deserves our ambivalence precisely because it was created by man and is an extension of man, and therefore has all our potential for both good and bad.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Stunning Perspective!, October 25, 2010
    I grew up being one of the Amish Hackers that Kevin describes in his book! When I first read Kevin's writings on our technology-evaluation-practices, I was astounded at the depth of his research and understanding. In fact, his unique perspective taught me a lot about my role in my own community that I had never really realized before.
    I am not as integrated in my close-knit horse-and-buggy community as I once was; since my latest and most dramatic, "hack" on life is that I'm currently enrolled as an undergrad at Columbia University. Life in NYC is great, but I still maintain close ties with the sharply-contrasted microcosm I came from. I too, just as Kevin does, understand the invaluable insight one can gain on contemporary culture by examining a given technology in a quite different social environment. I guess in some ways such a contrast can serve as a social scientist's independent variable.
    I want to testify that Kevin did not sensationalize his observations on the Amish Hacker and I can speak out of first person experience when I say that Kevin knows our culture and he knows it well!
    Incidentally, I think his introspect on technology and civilization is fresh, enlightening and a must-read for anyone planning to live in the coming decade and beyond! In less than a decade, Facebook and Google have inextricably integrated themselves into practically all of our lives. So more than ever, we need visionaries like Kevin to help us make sense of "its" agenda.

    5-0 out of 5 stars WTW is a page-turner! (However, on some key issues I beg to differ.), November 23, 2010
    Are you simply trying to decide whether to buy this book?
    The answer is "buy it. Absolutely, yes!"
    It is Kevin Kelly's (KK's) magnum opus.
    It is important, clearly and elegantly written, and
    thoroughly researched. Also, it's so good,
    it was hard to put down.

    Nobody is better qualified to write about technology and tools.
    This has been KK's lifetime focus, first as an editor of
    the Whole Earth Catalog (the bible of the hippie back-to-nature movement),
    second as a cofounder of the Well (a prominent early online community),
    then as executive editor of Wired, and finally as curator of Cool Tools
    (a popular website that reviews favorite tools) -
    not to mention his other widely-read books, eg "Out of Control."

    Other reviewers have summarized the book's major themes,
    included key quotations, and told you why the book is important.
    Coming late to the party, I will just hit a few crucial points that
    other reviewers have neglected.

    First, what I absolutely love about the book is KK's personal approach to life.
    Reading Wired you might think he would be using every fancy tech gadget
    the minute it comes out. Nothing could be further from the truth.
    He does not carry a cellphone; does not travel with a laptop;
    has no cable connection and does not watch tv. Why?
    Because he genuinely cares about his QUALITY of life.
    Kevin is a guy who spent years owning nothing but a sleeping bag and a bike,
    who admires the Amish, and who is decidely not an early adopter.
    Like the Amish, he will thoroughly evaluate a new device
    before allowing it into his personal world.
    Ambivalence and thoughtful examination are the essence of KK's approach to technology.
    I occasionally attend his wonderful Quantified Self seminar,
    where that sensitivity to life's nuances shines through.
    KK is not an unabashed flag-waver for technology,
    and human values are highly prized in WTW and in his life.
    Now, on to another topic.

    The New York Times Sunday Book Review of Nov 5, 2010 recently
    featured a critique of What Technology Wants (WTW) written
    by prominent biologist Jerry Coyne.
    Professor Coyne, an expert on evolution, fired a big gun at WTW.
    He said that while technology may have a "drive" toward complexity,
    albeit a metaphorical one, that is certainly not the case with evolution.
    Parallels between "the technium" and evolution figure prominently in WTW.
    Coyne rightfully points out that the biosphere (largely comprised
    of billion year old simple and unchanged bacterial species) has no mind of its own,
    and technology also does not.

    Coyne accuses Kelly of being a teleologist in the spirit, say, of Teilhard de Chardin.
    (I personally think Teilhard was right on the money.)
    Coyne is surely right in the sense that humankind was not predestined
    to rule Earth (and Kelly is quite aware of the highly contingent nature of evolution).
    The misleading part in Coyne's critique is his apparent
    neglect of the autocatalytic nature of both technology and biologic evolution,
    which WTW so superbly spells out. Both the technium and biology
    are propelled forward by building on past innovations,
    ie by "standing on the shoulders of giants," as Isaac Newton said.
    The innovations for technology were language, printing, science, and the internet
    (not to mention a ten millennia portfolio of other inventions).
    The innovations for biology were protocell formation,
    replicating macromolecules, energy storage, protein synthesis,
    photosynthesis, motility, sexual reproduction, etc.
    Since the Cambrian explosion, for us multicellular types,
    the patent portfolio has continued to accumulate:
    intercellular signaling networks, complex developmental programs,
    neural signaling, internal skeletons, teleceptors, etc.
    WTW shows exactly how the technium is autocatalytic in the
    same way that biology is. (Coyne's point that biologic evolution is
    fueled by random, non-prescient mutation is almost irrelevant. Nature is so prolific
    that the important part of its generate-and-test algorithm is really the test part.)
    Now, on to my major disagreements.

    My most important criticism of WTW stems from my concern
    for other species and our biosphere. Humanity and its technology have devasted
    the biosphere and are creating the greatest mass extinction in 65 million years.
    Technology has been a great boon to the human race (otherwise there would not
    be nearly 7 billion of us), but it has been an unmitigated disaster for all other species.
    KK devotes a chapter to these problems, but then seems to express equal concern
    about the slowing growth of the human population.

    He and I completely part company on this one.
    Sub-Saharan Africa, for example, is a disaster: internicine warfare, famine, AIDS.
    Closing your eyes to Malthus may work in California (and even here, not really)
    but not in Africa. Nanotechnology may eventually create a bright future
    for massive humanity, but before that there is a multidecade valley of death
    due to war, resource depletion, pollution, and disease.
    The planet does not need more humans.

    OK, technology has been great for humans but not for non-humans.
    How about the future? Again I disagree with KK, although here I am less vehement.
    (The future is profoundly unknowable: no one can see beyond the singularity,
    which is technology's future event horizon.)

    I don't share KK's rosy view of technology's fond embrace of humanity,
    although I hope it's true. Yes, technology gives us more options,
    which we can always renounce (as he himself frequently does.)
    However, in the medium-term (by 2050), technology
    (artificial intelligence, robotics, cognitive science) will rapidly
    leave humanity in its dust. See those marginalized gorillas in Africa,
    clinging for their lives. That could well be us.

    My great hope is that technology will create a Garden of Eden on Planet Earth
    just as WTW envisions. On the other hand, I think that outer space,
    will not be explored or settled by us but rather by highly advanced technology
    just as it currently is by NASA's space probes.
    This bifurcation between humanity and the technium will happen before 2050.
    I see no reason why a superior technium will inevitably share our values or value us.
    Our hands are stained with the blood of the world's species. Why won't we be next?

    Again, this is an important work, and I urge you to read it, my criticisms not withstanding.
    (I am a former Stanford AI researcher and physician who covers cognitive neuroscience
    and its overlap with AI on my website: bobblum.com )


    4-0 out of 5 stars Two Different Books in One, November 7, 2010
    Kevin Kelly has written a terrifically interesting book that is actually two books in one. The bookends (Parts 1 and 4) are pretty out there. In those portions of the book, Kelly aims to prove that "the technium" - "the greater, global, massively interconnected system of technology vibrating around us" (p. 11) -- is a "force" or even a living "organism" (p. 198) that has a "vital spirit" (p. 41) and which "has its own wants" (p. 15) and "a noticeable measure of autonomy." (p. 13) "The technium is whispering to itself," he says. (p. 14) At times, Kelly even seems to be longing for humanity's assimilation into the machine or The Matrix. "We can think of technology as our extended body," he says. (p. 44) He speaks repeatedly of human-machine "symbiosis." "We are now symbiotic with technology" (p. 37) and, apparently, that symbiotic bonding can get pretty intense as "humans are the reproductive organs of technology." (p. 296) Sounds a little kinky, but what the hell does that even mean? I think those are the weaker sections of the book. He sounds like one of those enviro-extremists who proselytizes about Gaia theories of Earth as a spirit or deity.

    But Kelly redeems himself with eight absolutely stunning chapters in the middle two parts of the book. Gone is most of the Gaia-like talk of the technium as a living organism. Kelly instead focuses on explaining to us in plain terms the progression of technology in our lives and how we've come to cope with it. He notes, for example, that "Over the centuries, societies have declared many technologies to be dangerous, economically upsetting, immoral, unwise, or simply too unknown for our good. The remedy to this perceived evil is usually a form of prohibition. The offending innovation may be taxed severely or legislated to narrow purposes or restricted to the outskirts or banned altogether." (p. 240)

    But banning technology never works, he argues, largely because humans adapt and embrace new tools and developments. "[H]istory shows that it is very hard for a society as a whole to say no to technology for very long." (p. 241) "Prohibitions are in effect postponements" and "wholesale prohibitions simply do not work to eliminate a technology that is considered subversive or morally wrong. Technologies can be postponed but not stopped." (p. 243)

    Importantly, Kelly doesn't turn a blind eye to the downsides of technology. In fact, he is refreshingly candid about the trade-offs we face. He argues that, "If we examine technologies honestly, each one as its faults as well as its virtues. There are no technologies without vices and none that are neutral. The consequences of a technology expand with its disruptive nature. Powerful technologies will be powerful in both directions - for good and bad. There is no powerfully constructive technology that is not also powerfully destructive in another direction, just as there is no great idea that cannot be greatly perverted for great harm... This should be the first law of technological expectation: The greater the promise of a new technology, the greater its potential for harm as well." (p. 246)

    Quite right. But then Kelly then goes on to masterfully discuss the dangers of applying the "precautionary principle" to technological advancement. Kelly correctly argues, is that because "every good produces harm somewhere... by the strict logic of an absolute Precautionary Principle no technologies would be permitted." (p. 247-8) Under such a regime, progress becomes impossible because trade-offs are considered unacceptable. This doesn't mean humans shouldn't try to foresee problems associated with new technologies or address them preemptively. But that can be done without resisting new technologies or technological change altogether. "The proper response to a lousy technology is not to stop technology or to produce no technology," Kelly argues. "It is to develop a better, more convivial technology." (p. 263)

    Kelly's formulation is remarkable similar to the "bad speech/more speech principle" from the field of First Amendment policy / jurisprudence. That principle states that the best solution to the problem of bad speech (such as hate speech or seditious talk) is more speech to counter it instead of censorship. That's the same principle that Kelly wants us to embrace when it comes to technology: Don't seek to ban or restrict it; find ways to embrace it, soften its blow, or counter it with new and better technology. I think that's a beautiful principle and I applaud Kevin Kelly's formulation and defense of it.

    In sum, I loved the middle sections of What Technology Wants, but I could have done without the silly "technology-as-organism" theories found in the opening and closing chapters. Overall, however, Kevin Kelly has written a book that demands our attention. We will be talking about What Technology Wants for many, many years to come.

    My complete review of Kelly's book can be found on the Technology Liberation Front blog.

    5-0 out of 5 stars What Technology Wants - Kevin Kelly (Viking), November 16, 2010
    As the founder of early internet platform The Well, a contributor to the famed Whole Earth Catalog and various pre-internet online endeavors, and a leading position at Wired magazine (in addition to his three personal blogs), Kevin Kelly has a long history in tech. His latest work is an expansive journey that takes an anthropological view of technology and explores how developments in the field have, as many suspect, taken on a life of their own.

    Lodged inexorably between a seven-year study and a life-long search, "What Technology Wants" tells of a journey that began by forcefully and systematically eschewing technology; first in an eight year ground trek across Asia where Kelly wandered the continent with little more than a sleeping bag and a change of clothes, to a west to east bicycle journey across America stopping in to experience the languid and decidedly non-technological lifestyle of the Amish people today. Only by unplugging for a great length of time was the author able to come to grips with the arc of technology that has layered itself over mankind and created what he describes as the "technium" in our lives.

    By viewing the long arc of technology, as essentially emergent from neurology - from the development of language some 50,000 years ago in the Sapien's rewired hominin brain, to the socialized world of the ancient Greeks (who originally fashioned the word technelogos) to the discoveries of Issac Newton, Darwin and Alexander Bell (the original convergence) to the future visions of nanotech and life beyond our own, Kelly is able to examine the destiny of technology in a way that gives way to an analysis through altitude. Such detachment is at the root of the concept that technology is ineluctably evolving on its own path, perhaps shape-shifted by us, that becomes more and more inevitable with each passing development.

    Kelly argues that by achieving its own kind of manifest destiny, technology grows and builds out of itself (now? always?) via auto-creation and that while man may still be able to influence its direction, it is essentially on its own path, largely, if not completely based on what has come before it. This living soul, this ghost in the machine is, in Kelly's estimation, a benevolent being that unlike some futuristic jeremiads (including his oft-cited references to Ted Kaczynski's "Unibomber Manifesto") will compliment man's existence as opposed to threatening it. There are, of course, differing views of that by futurists, but regardless, the book is here to explain more than it is to judge.

    With full-throated recommendations from the likes of Walter Isaacson, Nick Negroponte, Seth Godin ("a tour de force") and Brian Eno ("a landmark in modern thinking"), this work already has the attention of powerful thinkers and, despite its somewhat modest release, we predict Kelly's book is a sleeper that will grow, like a modern day "Future Shock," to be viewed as one of the significant new works of this still early millennium.

    5-0 out of 5 stars A brilliant and thorough thesis, a tour de force in writing, a thrilling ride, and important book for most anyone., December 6, 2010
    Quick review and recommendation:
    As a person with a B.Sci and half of a Whole Systems Design masters program, employed as a computer/network test engineer, and having read way too many science/society books, I recommend What Technology Wants with the highest praise -this is the missing manual for the meaning of life for secular, scientific, technologist types.

    Longer review and recommendation:
    I discovered Kevin Kelly's Out of Control: The New Biology of Machines, Social Systems, & the Economic World years after its arrival. This sounds overly dramatic, but it was a life changer. I was in a masters program (Whole Systems Design -Antioch U Seattle), a program that put all that is primitive on a pedestal, and advanced civilizations (along with their tools and lifestyles) were cast as anathema. I was choking on the putrid thesis my school was demanding we bow down to in order to walk away with a graduate diploma. I was getting high marks, but walked away before I got any dumber. When I dropped out I was midway through Out of Control: The New Biology of Machines, Social Systems, & the Economic World.

    Around this time I discovered the early draft of What Technology Wants, called The Technium. It was online, in blog format and even allowed reader comments.

    What Technology Wants fits into a zeitgeist with others -most primarily Whole Earth Discipline: An Ecopragmatist Manifesto, and Athena Techne: An Assertion of Technical, Civilized Virtue.

    Summation: Kevin Kelly is on fire in this volume, it begins with an attention-getting survey of his life experience as a qualification to answer "the question", fills in the bulk of the book with quality material, and (to my delight and surprise) ends with an even stronger and bolder assertion than earlier pages had stated.

    I like that the book did not wind down and end with a repeat of the book's general message, rather, in the closing pages Kelly commits heresy against the Nature First regime by saying there is more indication of God, and/or everthing good, in a cellphone than there is in a tree frog.

    What Technology Wants, Whole Earth Discipline: An Ecopragmatist Manifesto, and Athena Techne: An Assertion of Technical, Civilized Virtue are a tripartite representing a change in paradigm: the old paradigm wants to monkeywrench civilization in order to let Nature reign supreme, and these three great books of the new paradigm place technological civilization at the apex of all reality, and Kelly goes the extra mile by claiming technology is grand not because it is precious to mankind, but because it is precious to the universe.

    5-0 out of 5 stars A Must Read for Those Interested in the Future of Humanity, November 21, 2010
    Although I've bought and read hundreds of books from Amazon, this is the first one I've been inspired to write a review about. It's the first book I recommend if somebody asks me for "something new and interesting to read."

    I have long been interested in the future of humanity, and how technology has shaped our culture and identity. I've read just about everything I can get my hands on from Heidegger to Kurzweil. Kevin Kelly's newest effort sets itself apart from the crowd with its unique mix of tremendous scope and very human narrative. The book has extraordinary ambition but is undertaken with incredible humility.

    It's a true pleasure to read and I believe Kelly has added something important to the conversation concerning technology.

    His central premise is that technology is an extension of biological evolution. He is one of the few to talk concretely (and offers examples) of the ways in which we can resist, shape, and work with technology. He is also clear about the ways in which it's progress will be inevitable. Kelly is pioneering speaking of technology as a natural extension of biological technology, and I think in the future this will be the dominant way to talk about tech, not technology vs. biology but biology as technology. As we continue to reveal the incomprehensibility of the two-- and as we consciously merge the two-- we'll need leaders like Kelly to show us the blind corners in the road in our inevitable march towards increased diversity and new forms of technology.

    This book is nothing short of thrilling to read, and I'm sorry to have finished it.

    4-0 out of 5 stars Even if you don't fully share the view of the writer, it is worth reading, November 8, 2010
    The main idea is far from new. Similarities among different fields have been always used as a way to get new insights. However, this does not always work. There are excellent models like the ones by Stafford Beer and his comparison between biology and organizations and others that are fully trivial. This book has both: Some comparisons or some models are really brilliant and with a good support of data while others are obvious or less interesting.

    Technology or "technium" is not seen as similar to natural evolution but as the next phase of a wider evolutionary process. Some parts could remind of "I Robot" by Asimov but the general idea is:

    Phase 1: Evolutionary process has its specific features and can be seen everywhere.
    Phase 2: "Technium" is starting the same process through man-made artifacts and ideas.
    Phase 3: "Technium" is not starting a new process. Instead, it is the continuation of the same process.
    Phase 4: What can be said about the future?

    Perhaps the main advice for a potential reader should be an unfair one: Keep trying. It is unfair since a bad book does not deserve to be finished and this one could be seen in some parts as a bad book that already made its whole point. Not true. For instance, the chapter devoted to the Amish could be boring for many people (including me) but, after that one, it is possible to find others much more interesting.

    Paradoxes like the one shown with electric engines, present everywhere just before dissappearing (because we are not even conscious of how many common devices are powered by electric engines) are very interesting. It is worth to read it. ... Read more


    11. Living and Learning with New Media: Summary of Findings from the Digital Youth Project
    by Mizuko Ito, Heather A. Horst, Matteo Bittanti, Danah Boyd, Becky Herr-Stephenson, Patricia G. Lange, C. J. Pascoe, Laura Robinson
    Kindle Edition
    list price: $14.00
    Asin: B0030EFQ7U
    Publisher: The MIT Press
    Average Customer Review: 4.0 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    This report summarizes the results of an ambitious three-year ethnographic study, funded by the John D. and Catherine T. MacArthur Foundation, into how young people are living and learning with new media in varied settings—at home, in after school programs, and in online spaces. It offers a condensed version of a longer treatment provided in the book Hanging Out, Messing Around, and Geeking Out (MIT Press, 2009). The authors present empirical data on new media in the lives of American youth in order to reflect upon the relationship between new media and learning. In one of the largest qualitative and ethnographic studies of American youth culture, the authors view the relationship of youth and new media not simply in terms of technology trends but situated within the broader structural conditions of childhood and the negotiations with adults that frame the experience of youth in the United States.

    The book that this report summarizes was written as a collaborative effort by members of the Digital Youth Project, a three-year research effort funded by the John D. and Catherine T. MacArthur Foundation and conducted at the University of California, Berkeley, and the University of Southern California.

    John D. and Catherine T. MacArthur Reports on Digital Media and Learning
    ... Read more

    Reviews

    4-0 out of 5 stars An Interesting and Comprehensive Look at Learning with New Media, September 11, 2010
    Media revolutions in the past have always had a major impact on the society, be they television, radio, printing press, or just the invention of script. They had fundamentally reshaped the way that we learn and interact. The advent of the new digital media is just another stage in that progression, and almost every year these days there is a new gadget or a software product that fundamentally reshapes our modes of living and learning. The segment of society that is usually the first one to adapt to the new culture are the young as they tend to be the most open to the new experiences. However, despite some dire predictions of the negative impact of the new media on the breakdown of society, there has been very little empirical research that attempts to document what actual young people are doing online and how they are interacting with the new media. The aim of this report is to address many of these concerns. The report analyzes many case studies for which the fieldwork had been conducted between 2006 and 2007, spanning many different social and ethnic groups in the United States. This is primarily a qualitative study that provides us with some new insights and points in the direction for possible future work. The research method used can be described as ethnographic, i.e. it tries to figure out how technology and media are meaningful for people in their everyday life. This is a very appropriate way of conducting research in this particular area as the technologies and media are in a constant state of flux and categories that are relevant for this subject are continuously changing.

    One of the more interesting aspects of this research is that the researchers have avoided categorizing their subjects along the overused categories of class, race and gender, but have instead focused more on "genres" of participation that can be very situation specific. For instance, each research subject can participate in several different genres and change his or her participation pattern depending on the medium that is used.

    The variety of groups of young people who had been interviewed for this research is truly remarkable. The report gives us a good sense of the kinds of interactions and engagements that young people today are engaged in. The level of participation, however, varies depending on the skill level and the motivation that the participants bring along with them. At the basic level youth is using the new media to just hang out and socialize, and in this respect the online world is a very direct extension of the social interactions that are present in the "real" world. A qualitatively different form o engagement happens when young people start using the new sets of online tools that prompt them to engage in a more creative and original ways. The young people who create new content or even new products and services tend to be highly intelligent and motivated individuals, but other than that they come from all social and ethnic backgrounds.

    Overall, this is a very interesting and informative report that ought to be read by parents, educators and all those who are interested in helping young people make the most of the new media.

    4-0 out of 5 stars Changing the Debate, October 4, 2010
    It took a small army of authors, postdoc fellows, grad assistants, undergrad researchers, and associated contributors to discover that the generational influence of digital media is... um, not that different from other generational infuences in the past. Which is no small discovery. Twenty years of discourse on new media has been largely dominated by scare tactics and misplaced anger. Though this brief white paper leaves some questions unanswered, it will hopefully allay baseless fears and turn the discourse in more productive directions.

    Our authors spent three years observing how youth utilize the new media, and they divide their findings into three broad areas. In the first, "hanging out," youth use tech to make and interact with friends. Parents may think this frivolous, but it allows subject specialization and geographic diffusion that make me downright jealous. The authors describe online role-players mustering groups of 150 to carry out massive organized attacks on fearsome monsters. Recalling my long-haired youth, when dragooning five fellow nerds for an ad hoc Dungeons & Dragons game required Kissinger-like diplomacy, I can't help thinking these kids have it posh.

    The second area, "messing around," sees kids wanting to discover the possibilities of their technology for personnal improvement or self-education. You read that right: it sees kids WANTING to learn. Largely ignored in academic settings, this desire has nevertheless seen youth jumping off the rails of adult-guided schooling for a more peer-based and collaborative approach in which they learn recreational, practical, and even professional skills without grown-ups hanging around to grade and judge them.

    The third area, "geeking out," sees youth delve aggressively into whatever field motivates their passion. Media content generation, fan culture, and code-crunching all get disparaged by parents as a waste of time, but they help youth create purpose-built peer communities in which all collaborate. Youth bond, build connections, and unify over their creations in ways people my age never could when we had to photocopy fan magazines for the two dozen friends who shared our obscure interests.

    Our authors leave some questions unanswered. Are the skills youth learn in digital communities portable to real life, or will they remain online fan curiosities? When your community is scattered globally, what happens when you need real neighborliness? If youth educate themselves on a peer-to-peer basis, how do they avoid having to reinvent the wheel when they encounter questions they can't answer, but a adult might?

    But if we read this study not as an answer to all questions, but as an attempt to repurpose the debate, it offers needed perspectives for parents and teacers. Like the Model T, television, or rock & roll, digital media has been subject to nasty snap opinions. But if we think rather than react, we can use the new opportunities to help youth rather than see them as merely circling the drain. ... Read more


    12. Confronting the Challenges of Participatory Culture: Media Education for the 21st Century
    by Henry Jenkins
    Kindle Edition
    list price: $14.00
    Asin: B0030DFWZM
    Publisher: The MIT Press
    Average Customer Review: 4.0 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    Many teens today who use the Internet are actively involved in participatory cultures—joining online communities (Facebook, message boards, game clans), producing creative work in new forms (digital sampling, modding, fan videomaking, fan fiction), working in teams to complete tasks and develop new knowledge (as in Wikipedia), and shaping the flow of media (as in blogging or podcasting). A growing body of scholarship suggests potential benefits of these activities, including opportunities for peer-to-peer learning, development of skills useful in the modern workplace, and a more empowered conception of citizenship. Some argue that young people pick up these key skills and competencies on their own by interacting with popular culture; but the problems of unequal access, lack of media transparency, and the breakdown of traditional forms of socialization and professional training suggest a role for policy and pedagogical intervention.

    This report aims to shift the conversation about the "digital divide" from questions about access to technology to questions about access to opportunities for involvement in participatory culture and how to provide all young people with the chance to develop the cultural competencies and social skills needed. Fostering these skills, the authors argue, requires a systemic approach to media education; schools, afterschool programs, and parents all have distinctive roles to play.

    The John D. and Catherine T. MacArthur Foundation Reports on Digital Media and Learning
    ... Read more

    Reviews

    4-0 out of 5 stars The importance of technology and media in the classroom., July 24, 2010
    Henry Jenkins has written several books dealing with technology, media, bloggers, gamers and the like. Now with Confronting the Challenges of Participatory Culture: Media Education for the 21st Century he has added education to the mix.

    Jenkins notes several important things about the future of education (which interested me as a teacher). Formal education must address technology. It cannot be just paper and pencil. Technology is part of the modern world's media - it is not just newspapers, books, magazines, TV and movies. There are blogs, social media and a new one I hadn't really considered: video games.

    Jenkins encourages the use of video games to teach. There are already several games such as Sims and the various history-based empire building games that teach rules and strategies for life. Jenkins cites the example of a young man who learned a lot about Rome (and through Rome, the structures of all societies) by playing an online game, Caesar 3. The lessons learned were interesting, but the costs was too prohibitive for any school to use. It was not monetary costs (more on that down below) but the time costs. This young man invested hundreds of hours into this game. That cannot be done in a classroom, clearly, nor can I, as a teacher, guarantee that I can find anything like this that all, or even most, of my students can find a similar interest in.

    But, the point is made and it is true - modern American students must be familiar with technology of all sorts.

    Jenkins makes three other important points:

    1) Students must be able to interpret and verify the value of all sorts of media. It is hard for students to distinguish advertising from more objective media. Students also fall for the age old problem of judging a book by its cover. They tend to think that the more polished the website, the more accurate its information. Let's admit it, it is easy to make that mistake and requires judgment based on knowledge and experience to overcome that bias.

    2) There is a technological divide. Poorer students have less access. Students who have other interests chose to access less (a topic Jenkins only brushes). How do schools attempt to bridge this divide? I don't know that they truly can. Schools have computers and programs but, as any experienced computer user knows, it is quite expensive to keep up with technology.

    If a school buys a desk, it is usable for a decade, maybe longer. It is current and does not need upgrading and minimal maintenance. Any computer a school buys is nearly out of date by the time it is installed. The programs are not current and buying the newest and latest cna cost hundreds of dollars for each copy for each computer in which it is installed, or thousands upon thousands for site licenses. Throw in to that the personnel to maintain the computers, the infrastructure to make them more usable and you're talking millions of dollars for a modern American high school. Millions of dollars that has to be re-invested every few years for upgrades and replacements.

    To go back to the desks, it is very possible that the first school I taught in (1990-1993) is using the same student desks that were there when I taught. That school had 3 Apple Macintosh computers in the whole building. That's it. No classroom computers. Schedules were done by hand. Attendance was taken on paper. Since then, they've made a massive investment in servers, labs, printers, wires, projectors and it all has to be upgraded all of the time.

    In a time of massive budget cuts, some of this becomes mere theory rather than practical discussion.

    3) To his credit, Jenkins does not recommend that the computer/media literacy he espouses become a separate class. Rather, he encourages its integration into all classes. While this sounds like a way to get around the time issue (how can you fit a computer/media literacy class into a schedule that is so full as to prohibit many students from making any true choices in their schedule as it is?) this still takes time out of every class and practically guarantees the education he seeks will stay at the very basic level throughout the student's time in school.

    So, to sum up, Jenkins makes plenty of observations on the value of technology to education - all of which I have no doubt are quite true. But, in our present educational climate I am not seeing many of these proposals moving from theory into genuine action.

    Parents, it always has been and always will be up to you to fill in the blanks that a general education leaves and encourage your child. Technology is no different. Reading this book will give a parent an idea of where to go and how to proceed.

    4-0 out of 5 stars Timely and Informative, September 17, 2010
    There are many salient features of the new media that has arisen over the past couple of decades, but perhaps the most important of these is the way that it has changed the way information is being consumed. None of us watch news passively any more, nor do we just use technology only in the ways that it was originally intended. We comment on the news article stories, either on the news sites themselves or even more prevalently today by sharing them with our social circles of friends. We also modify products or combine them with others in order to suit our own intentions and purposes. All of these actions are characteristics of the new "participatory culture," and this report illustrates how this culture is increasingly changing and shaping our lives.

    One of the more interesting aspects of this book is a positive attitude towards video games. The author argues, against a lot of skepticism that is still present in society at large, that video games can be an interesting and useful educational vehicle and that educators need to help kids with getting the most benefit from playing. There has been a lot of research done on this topic, and the overwhelming consensus is that video games are overall mostly beneficial for the young people, even when it comes to socialization and civic engagement. With that in view it is not a radical or even controversial premise that using video games in an educational setting is wrongheaded.

    This report also takes an issue with the whole notion that creative endeavors necessarily ought to be completely original, independent of all previous cultural influences. The author emphasizes the fact that most great creative individuals in the past (Homer, Shakespeare, Michelangelo) have freely borrowed others themes and ideas, and in the process created invaluable original works of art. The author advocates a much more unrestrained approach to fostering the creativity of the young people and gives several examples of how this could be achieved.

    The report concludes with many good suggestions for parents, teachers and other who have a stake in promoting the technological literacy amount the young. This is a very well presented case for a more active educational engagement with the new and emerging technologies.
    ... Read more


    13. The Path Between the Seas: The Creation of the Panama Canal, 1870-1914
    by David McCullough
    Paperback
    list price: $20.00 -- our price: $12.01
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0671244094
    Publisher: Simon & Schuster
    Sales Rank: 2142
    Average Customer Review: 4.7 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    From the Pulitzer Prize-winning author of Truman, here is the national bestselling epic chronicle of the creation of the Panama Canal. In The Path Between the Seas, acclaimed historian David McCullough delivers a first-rate drama of the sweeping human undertaking that led to the creation of this grand enterprise.

    The Path Between the Seas tells the story of the men and women who fought against all odds to fulfill the 400-year-old dream of constructing an aquatic passageway between the Atlantic and Pacific oceans. It is a story of astonishing engineering feats, tremendous medical accomplishments, political power plays, heroic successes, and tragic failures. Applying his remarkable gift for writing lucid, lively exposition, McCullough weaves the many strands of the momentous event into a comprehensive and captivating tale.

    Winner of the National Book Award for history, the Francis Parkman Prize, the Samuel Eliot Morison Award, and the Cornelius Ryan Award (for the best book of the year on international affairs), The Path Between the Seas is a must-read for anyone interested in American history, the history of technology, international intrigue, and human drama. ... Read more

    Reviews

    5-0 out of 5 stars History writing at its best, May 11, 2000
    David McCullough makes the epic story of the building of the Panama Canal come to life in a way that few authors could. Throughout the long history of tranportation across the Central American isthmus (first railroad, then canal) McCollough focusses on fascinating characters like the brilliant but enigmatic Frechman Ferdinand de Lesseps, who built the Suez Canal but whose career crashed and burned in Panama. McCullough's skill as a storyteller simply cannot be understated. The book will leave you with a true appreciation of just how Herculean an undertaking the canal was. This book is simply one of the best works of history to appear in the last quarter century.

    5-0 out of 5 stars A Very Good Tale, July 11, 2000
    David McCollough is a heck of a writer -- a fact I already knew from reading his wonderful biography Truman. His skill does justice to an epic story of recent times: the building of the Panama Canal.

    This big book is necessary to tell a big tale. The effort to build the Path Between the Seas across the isthmus of Panama lasted from the 1870's through 1914. In a nutshell, first the French tried and failed to build a sea level crossing at Panama. This was in pursuit of a vision held by many national leaders in order to cut thousands of miles from the journey from the Atlantic to the Pacific oceans. The Americans picked up where the French left off, and after a decade succeeded in creating a crossing using locks and a man-made lake.

    What McCollough does so well is flesh out the above nutshell. It is a tale that would not be believed if written as fiction. The level of incompetence, misfeasance and malfeasance, wondrously peculiar personalities, engineering failures and brilliance, vision and size astound the reader and underscore how that age relied more upon enthusiasm, idealism and optimism in the pursuit of grand efforts than does our careful and measured era. The French followed the builder of the Suez Canal into the jungles of Panama. Tens of thousands of French families invested their life savings in the stock of a company that had no plans for the actual canal, very little good data of conditions on the isthmus, no idea of the amount of earth required to be removed, and no budget that would pay for the grand adventure. After spending the 1870's and 1880's mired in the jungle, losing tens of thousands (mostly black Caribbean workers -- the people who really built the canal) to disease and accident, raising increasingly more expensive capital in desperate gambles to stay afloat, the French effort collapsed. Shame, ignominy and jail awaited some of the project leaders. Their effort will amaze the reader -- that such an ill-conceived (that's too much of a compliment it wasn't even conceived at all beyond "we'll dig it -- viva la France!") undertaking could consume much of the savings of middle class France reminds one of how susceptible people can be to charlatans and swindlers.

    Into the breach stepped Teddy Roosevelt. This story once again displays the Presidents immense force of personality, drive and integrity. Evidence strongly suggests he made a revolution in Panama to win that then Colombian province away from a country that could not come to terms with the United States on acquiring the rights to dig the canal. He then ensured, through the use of highly skilled and able administrators, that the organization, logistics, financing and authority existed to make what for years stood as the world's largest construction effort. Great credit for the actual building goes to several engineers and their staff -- many US Army engineers. The success also greatly rested on Col. Gorgas and his partially successful efforts to battle disease: yellow fever, malaria and a host of others that had cost upwards of 200 of every thousand the French employed a generation earlier.

    McCollough brings scores of fascinating personalities to light. He tells of the financial and great political battles that attended all of the stages of the canal effort. The engineering and workings of the canal are simply and clearly laid out. The important efforts to improve sanitation and fight the mosquito borne diseases are succinctly explained. All of these elements are rendered interesting and tightly woven in this very good book.

    5-0 out of 5 stars A brilliant history of the Panama Canal, February 29, 2000
    "The Path Between the Seas" is narrative history at its best - the story of perhaps the greatest engineering feat of modern times. Writing in the clear and lucid style for which he is noted, historian David McCullough traces the creation of the Panama Canal from its earliest inception by the French in 1870, to its completion 44 years later by the United States.

    McCullough skillfully weaves personalities and events together to create a powerful narrative replete with political intrigue, financial scandal, and triumph over tremendous adversity. The author first acquaints the reader with the leaders of the French attempt to build the canal - Ferdinand de Lesseps and his son, Charles, and Phillippe Bunau-Varilla, among others - and tells of the ultimate failure of their venture, and their disgrace due to financial scandal. McCullough then chronicles the ultimately successful American attempt to build the canal. Here is seen the political intrigue (the U.S. backed Panamanian revolution against Colombia, with the complicity of President Theodore Roosevelt, Secretary of State John Hay, and Bunau-Varilla); the successful war against yellow fever and malaria, led by American doctor William Gorgas; and the organizational and engineering genius of two American Chief Engineers - John Stevens and Colonel George Goethals - which led to the completion of the canal in 1914.

    "The Path Between the Seas" is more than just the story of how the Panama Canal was built; it is a well researched, historically accurate, and at the same time lively and highly entertaining account of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. Highly recommended!

    4-0 out of 5 stars Great telling of an epic., March 17, 2002
    McCullough is a master of the English language. This was my first non-biography of his and though it was very entertaining, it was not quite as captivating as his John Adams or Truman. The book is divided naturally into the French effort and the American effort, with ample interlocking references. Fleshing out the individual principal characters is McCullough's strong suit, and as always, they seem to come alive in this book. Research is complete and lends just enough detail without becoming too tedious. The book seems to end rather abruptly, but then again that seems to be historically accurate, as much of the fanfare was lost in the European conflict that had erupted just as the Canal was opened. In any case, this is a job well done and a book worth reading.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Exciting, Romantic, and Thought-Provoking, March 5, 2002
    I hold a personal interest in the Canal as I have just visited it and am a direct descendant of Col. David Gaillard one of the American engineers of the Canal, and all everyone in Panama told me was to read Mr. McCullough's account of its creation. As a history major in school, I read many great and many bland histories; this book ranks in as one of the most captivating books I have read, fiction or non-fiction. Even if one does not have any previous interest in the Canal, after the first pages you will become hooked. McCullough writes with such elegant prose and interesting humor, that the story unfolds like a Victorian novel. From the incredible cast of characters (from Ferdinand de Lessups to Teddy Roosevelt), the intrigue, the conspiracies, the romance, the quest for one of Man's greatest achievements explodes into an incredible book that will keep the reader thinking about the Canal for years to come...and will compel the same reader to venture to this tropical country and view the incredible "8th Wonder of the World" himself.

    5-0 out of 5 stars A Most Profound WorK!!, August 9, 2000
    I found Mr. McCullough's book about the building of the Panama Canal to be well written, extra-well researched, and highly entertaining! I would recommend this book to anyone who truly wants to know what it took to build such an engineering marvel. Having lived in Panama twice and visited on many occasions, I can attest to the fact Mr. McCullough's book is THE SOURCE for accurate information on the canal and it's builders (both French and American efforts). I would also recommend purchasing the NOVA video, which Mr. McCullough narrates, called "A Man, A Plan, A Canal, Panama". He even quotes out of his own book on screen! I've never read a book so intricately and fastidiously researched. MUST READING for the true Canal enthusiast.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Nobody Beats McCullough, October 12, 1999
    I cannot say enough good things about David McCullough. "The Path Between The Seas" is my third McCullough book ("Mornings on Horseback" and "Truman") and is a masterpiece. "The Great Bridge" is next on my list.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Great background on a world altering historical event, September 4, 2006
    Most people have limited education in the building of the Panama Canal. The sum total of my knowledge, prior to reading this book, was that Theodore Roosevelt fostered a revolution in the Columbian state of Panama in order to complete the work abandoned by the French. That disease and pestilence was rife in the region and that American technology and know how carried the day. Mostly correct, but woefully simplistic.

    This book, written by the outstanding author, David McCollough, does an excellent job of tracking the canal project from its inception to completion, a story lasting about 35 years. The financial and political intrigue accompanying the French effort is captivating. The change of scenery (but with an equal amount of intrigue) to the American project breathes fresh life into the story. And what a story it is. It would be easy to attribute the ultimate success to superior American ingenuity and resolve, however, while this did indeed play a part, the impact of a national, government financed effort (as opposed to the privately financed French effort) coupled with huge strides in medical and mechanical technology in the intervening years probably was the most compelling reason for American success.

    McCollough, in the course of the book, touches on virtually all aspects of both the French and American experiences, from scandalous financial dealings, back room political deal making, the strong decisive personalities involved and the social and cultural factors which played such a huge part in the project.

    In reading this book, you began to develop an appreciation for the immense scope of the undertaking and the effort required to pull it off. The level of organization required in such an effort is almost mindboggling. It is difficult to imagine a project of equal magnitude (perhaps the NASA moon landings). I highly recommend this book to anyone with an interest in history. It should be required reading in all high schools.

    4-0 out of 5 stars An extremely thorough history of the Panama Canal, April 22, 2006
    The Panama Canal represents one of the great battles between man and nature and is truly one of the wonders of human achievement, especially when one considers the technology available at the time it was built. The Path Between the Seas chronicles the many difficulties faced, as well as the men and the scientific advances that eventually overcame those challenges.

    Ultimately this is more of a history lesson than an engineering textbook. While McCullough does an admirable job of describing the massive excavation operations, that is but a small part of what occurred during the 44-year period the book covers. McCullough grants the reader an insider's view of the "revolution" that created the independent nation of Panama and paints a vivid picture of what life was like during the construction period. He also brings attention to the individuals who played a major role in the eventual success of the endeavor, from the men who governed the canal zone to the physicians who discovered, and virtually eradicated, the causes of some of the worst tropical diseases of the time. The book includes a number of maps and photographs that help illustrate the narrative.

    Interestingly, much of the book takes place far from Panama. Shortly after the close of the Civil War the United States and other powers began surveying Central America with an eye towards building a canal there. In a time before satellites or aircraft this proved to be a demanding and deadly undertaking. Despite the relatively short distance across the Isthmus at Panama, this was not the only location considered for a canal. In fact, Panama was widely considered to be the wrong place to build the canal. An abundance of back-room deals and propaganda campaigns had to take place in both France and the United States to turn a Panama canal into a reality.

    The Path Between the Seas is a well-written book that I would recommend to others with the caveat that this is a long, densely packed book that is likely to appeal primarily to those with a strong interest in history.

    5-0 out of 5 stars A Splendid History Of The Panama Canal's Construction, December 14, 2001
    So riveting is David McCullough's account of the construction of the Panama Canal, that it is one of the few works of nonfiction outside of the sciences that I have read twice. He chrnoicles a mesmerizing saga of despair and triumph, starting with Ferdinand de Lesseps disastrous attempt at building a sea level canal through the disease-infested jungles of Panama. The second half covers the American effort at building the Panama Canal, a project as grandiose as developing the atomic bomb or landing men on the moon. McCullough describes the groundbreaking work of Dr. Gorgas' team of doctors and nurses in combatting malaria and yellow fever; their success made possible the canal's eventual completion by U. S. Army engineer George Goethals. While McCullough does a splendid job in providing facts and figures with his graceful prose, he also excels in recounting the lives of many of the prominent figures associated with the Panama Canal's construction. For example, McCullough describes General Goethals' substantial role after the United States' entry into World War I and his subsequent work as the first chief engineer of the Port Authority of New York and New Jersey. Indeed, if there is a hero in this saga, it most certainly has to be General Goethals. Along with McCullough's history of the Brooklyn Bridge's construction, this has to rank as one of the most spellbinding tales written about American technological ingenuity in the late 19th and early 20th centuries. ... Read more


    14. The Art of War
    by Sun Tzu
    Paperback (1971-09-15)
    list price: $11.95 -- our price: $6.16
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0195014766
    Publisher: Oxford University Press
    Sales Rank: 2012
    Average Customer Review: 4.4 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    Written in China over two thousand years ago, Sun Tzu's The Art of War provides the first known attempt to formulate a rational basis for the planning and conduct of military operations. These wise, aphoristic essays contain principles acted upon by such twentieth-century Chinese generals as Mao Tse Tung. Samuel Griffith offers a much-needed translation of this classic which makes it even more relevant to the modern world. Including an explanatory introduction and selected commentaries on the work, this edition makes Sun Tzu's timeless classic extremely accessible to students of Chinese history and culture, as well as to anyone interested in the highly volatile military and political issues in present-day China. ... Read more

    Reviews

    4-0 out of 5 stars Whose book are we reading, December 5, 2000
    I must admit that there are pearls of wisdom scattered throughout this book, it seems that you must wade through depths of Samuel Griffiths' editorial comments to reach them. While Griffith seems very knowledgable, I had a hard time sorting out Sun Tzu's views and Griffith' opinions on them. Much time was spent on how Tzu's works affected other military and cultural leaders of history. While this was interesting reading, I thought I was buying The Art of War, by Sun Tzu, whan actually, I was buying a book written about the book.

    4-0 out of 5 stars Whatever you were looking for, you've found it here., March 13, 1999
    In ART OF WAR, there is a rare thing in books in which all of it or most of it can relate to many things. If the reader uses some of these war tactics and strategies in the modern world, they may find it easy to relate. Business is war, but in a different scenario than actual battles. Thus it is easy to relate to this book. Even rivals in sports and entertainment can be outwitted by the wisdom in this book. It also adds examples of some actions, which show how these sayings and writings apply to the real world.

    So no matter what you were looking for in this book, whether it be business, entertainment, sports, war games, actual wars, or even travel, you can be sure to learn more on how ot attack life here.

    The book's age is hard and easy to see at the same time. You can tell that it was written thousands of years ago by what Sun Tzu tells of. (Chariots, gold pieces are currency, etc...), but some of the grammar and language are shown well in the translation in the book, making it easy to read in English as well as other languages you would be able to find the book in.

    The only weakness of this book would have to be its accented topic towards foriegn countries, and much older devices. The way to break through this is for the reader to be able to translate it into his/her life.

    --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    4-0 out of 5 stars A clear and useful translation, January 4, 2003
    The Art of War is a military classic, written around 400 BC. However, because the maxims contained in the book are so succinct and universal, this is still a useful book for understanding and waging war today. The central themes are to attack where the enemy is weak, deceive the enemy into attacking you on your terms (not his), and the use of espionage to confuse the enemy while gathering information for your own use.

    This book is a classical, scholarly translation. I cannot comment on the accuracy of the translation, as I do not read Chinese. However, the translator sprinkles the text with footnotes to explain why he has chosen certain phrases that do not directly translate, and offers alternative explanations from other translators. Therefore, you get a good feel for what Sun Tzu originally meant, especially through the critical inclusion of selected commentaries. In addition, there is an introduction by the author on the history and background of the text, which are useful. There are also some comments on the influence the text has had, especially on Mao Tse-tung and on the Imperial Japanese forces through World War II.

    Therefore, I certainly recommend this translation for a first-time reader such as myself.

    4-0 out of 5 stars Broadening Your Perspective, September 21, 2001
    War is not really based on honor... or glory, or even whose right. It's all about conditions, who has the advantage and how to dishearten your opponents while making sure your own resources are protected. It tells you what to look for through hundreds of various quotes and snippets of advice. This book was not entirely by Sun Tzu, but a collection of famous tacticians through-out history. Each seem to add another element to the concept of how to win in conflict.

    In life, you can see a little of this in each day... but just remember not too get too carried away. After all, even Sun Tzu himself said 'A battle not fought, is a battle won.' For broadening your perspective, I'd suggest adding this book to your collection as well as 'Open Your Mind, Open Your Life: A Little Book of Eastern Wisdom' by Taro Gold.

    4-0 out of 5 stars AP World History Review, August 21, 2001
    I read the book entitled, The Art of War by Sun Tzu. I feel that Sun Tzus purpose of writing this book is that of teaching war strategies. His emphasis was on not killing people, rather that of emerging victorious in the least amount of time. He was much more interested in confusion rather than massacre. Sun Tzu stresses that the war needs to be quickly won, he has been quoted to say, There has never been a protracted war from which a country has benefited. I believe that even today, these strategies that Sun Tzu came up with, prove to be effective. Deception, not necessarily deceit, is one of the principal concepts in this novel. Sun Tzu had first hand experience in The Art of War; therefore his essays are provoking and believable. Sun Tzus theories on war can be applied to a great many things, such as business and sports. Sun Tzu accomplished his goal, that being to teach people his theories on war. He was, during his time, a very unique man, and during our time, he still is a very unique man. The original novel was written by Sun Tzu in about 400 B.C. There has been much deliberation about when Sun Tzu existed, or even if he existed. It is only an approximation to say he was around in 400 B.C. Due to the words he uses and his descriptions of the time period, scholars have reach an approximate time in which he lived. The translator of Sun Tzus essays makes this information readily available and understandable. It has then been translated many times. I read the version translated by, Samuel B. Griffith. Samuel B. Griffith did an obscene amount of research on this project. He includes an extensive bibliography as well as a recognition page. Some of his sources include; The Taiheiki. A Chronicle of Medieval Japan by Helen Craig, The Analects of Confucius by Arthur Waley, and The Development of Iron and Steel Technology in China by J. Needham. He also included an introduction to make the fourth century B.C. more understandable. Griffith explained to the unknowing person why Sun Tzus essays were written. That was extremely helpful due to the fact I had little knowledge of that time period. There were also numerous other things that helped to make the novel clearer such as; maps to show monopolies, paintings of Sun Tzu himself, and various Chinese symbols. One such painting was entitled Sun Tzu Drilling the Concubines of King Ho-Lu. This picture shows Sun Tzu trying to confuse his enemies through training women. I believe that this man was enthralled with this translation. You can feel that from his writing. His writing, though overwhelming at first, is easily understandable and rather entertaining. He provides many different views on the some subject. I really enjoyed reading this book. All of Griffiths enthusiasm poured into his writing made it a quick, entertaining read. I must admit, during the first part of the book, I was rather bored. There was so much history that was going on while reading, I saw no point to the book being written. As I got farther into The Art of War I began to see things in a different light. The words began to mean something to me. I was able to relate some of the phrases into my own life. That changed everything for me. In my mind, and hopefully in everyone elses mind that has read this book, this was indeed a book that needed to be written. I think that it should be required reading to all those studying business. It may seem weird that a book written about war pertains to business; however, many strategies taken metaphorically can help a great many people. People in the navy, military, or the army should read this book as well. I think it is rather obvious why they should read it though. If you do not fit into any of these categories, you should still read the essays. If not for anything else it can teach you quite a bit about early Chinese culture. I think any person can take away something from this book. Whether it is to not be so blunt, not let others control you, or something simpler like having a plan and accomplishing it in the shortest amount of time. I advise everyone to at least attempt to read these essays by Sun Tzu. You will not regret it.

    5-0 out of 5 stars The Timeless Beauty of War, May 11, 2002
    War is ugly, dirty, brutal, wasteful and expensive. That is the reality of it. Let's not pretend otherwise.

    Having said that, the ancient Chinese master strips away all the familiar trappings of war - the warriors, weapons, forts and tactics - to reveal the essence of conflict and how to win.

    His lessons are as valid here and now as they were in an empire a long time ago and far, far away. It simply does not matter how you are fighting, what you are fighting over nor even why you are fighting. If you are forced into conflict with another, the lessons in this book will guarantee victory.

    Brute strength, overwhelming force, super weapons, holding the high ground, none of these are required for victory. All that is needed is a leader who can understand and apply the principles of warfare.

    Essentially it boils down to three ideas.
    1. Know yourself.
    2. Know your enemy.
    3. Only fight when you can win.

    Do this, and you will win competitions, elections, games. Anything that involves conflict. Even wars.

    Sun Tzu's elegant language lays bare the principles of warfare, illustrating his lessons with examples from Ancient China. It is a thought-provoking, colourful and valuable book.

    4-0 out of 5 stars Great book on war, February 22, 2002
    Sun Tzu's essays on war make up the first known book on the subject. The translator has done a good job translating the original text and providing commentary. The writing is clear, however the order is somewhat confusing, which is probably due to the translation (it might have sounded more orderly in the original text). Also, you can tell by looking at a lot of what is written that the author assumes that the reader has knowledge of many of the circumstances and events in ancient China. The translator largley solves the problem through the use of footnotes, although the constant skipping between the footnotes and the original text becomes frustrating at times.
    While many maintain that the content of the book can be applied to business or life or whatever, I believe that putting it that crudely is quite misleading. The book was originally written for the purpose of war and combat, and that is what most of the book deals with. However, one will occasionally pass through important wisdoms that one can apply in many fields of life, such as the importance of knowing one's adversary.
    Overall this is a good read. Get it if you have the time to read it (which shouldnt be more than a couple of hours a day for a week max).

    5-0 out of 5 stars Missing the boat to China?, August 10, 2000
    Its infuriating to read so many people praise a book they clearly do not understand when they think its a bunch of flowery Chinese words that can apply to anything and any situation. This is a sign that these folks do not understand THE most important book ever written about warfare. Because of this Western mindset failing, I have to place B.H. Liddell-Hart's Strategy as the FIRST and most important military book ever written--read this first THEN tackle Sun Tzu's Art of War. Together these are THE two most important military books ever written and for the impatient I will explain why.

    Hart explains through military history how warfare is a mental battle that is executed in the physical plane for a tangible result. Sun Tzu's thrust is the same--and its not just a gimmick or a ploy one uses by tacking onto a Western mindset of materialism or the like. The Eastern mind which Sun Tzu articulates does not see war or conflict as "good" or as a means to an end. Its in a fascinating way, a view that is more Judeo-Christian than the so-called Protestant reformation-based West's concepts of positional warfare and a climactic battle as a form of a nation-state duel that justifies their existence (raison d-etre) in that Sun Tzu sees the highest form of warfare is AVOIDING IT by deception and psychological ploys that result in the enemy becoming your friend because war is a waste for everyone that practices it. Those that see Sun Tzu as an after-school karate class one takes to be a nice-to-have adjunct to an ends-justifies-the-means run-over-people-to-get-what-you-want Western mindset are "missing the boat" and reading the book at a very shallow, selfish level. These folks are really wannabe Samarai reading a book for quiet ninjas.

    Sun Tzu also goes on to show that the epitome of warfighting is NOT "prolonged operations, however brilliantly executed" but the General who can avoid war and ironically by so doing receives no glory or acclaim yet is the true hero of the people and the state. What this means is that today--in the 21st Century with the information warfare means available to us, we can for the first time execute Sun Tzu's vision better than ever before because we can bypass armies and bloody fights and reach the hearts/minds of the people themselves--if we are clever and moral enough to do so. If we think of Sun Tzu as a parlor trick, we will not have the morality to persuade the other person to join our side and the trickery of physical fighting will only yield a temporary victory as the enemy rebounds at a later date. Sun Tzu looks deep into the human condition, to understand him you have to do the same; the way of a ninja is more closely related to this kind of thinking than a samurai looking for public acclaim/attention. A true ninja today would use Sun Tzu to make the militaries of the free world more effective in 4th Generation War (See Van Crevald's The Transformation of War) and use all the customary battlefield tricks of indirectness and deception he talks about if these primary efforts fail. If you want to truly understand Sun Tzu, get your mind on the right boat to China and look deep into your condition as a human and put aside what he says as gimmicks.

    5-0 out of 5 stars "Greed is good..." -0Gordon Gecko on Competition, July 10, 2000
    I originally bought my first copy of this book, when I was a teenager, after I viewed the movie "Wall Street." In the movie, Gordon Gecko (Michael Douglas) tells Charlie Sheen's character to read the book and learn from it. Now that I'm older I understand what he meant. The battlefield lessons provided by Sun Tzu - can be used in today's business empires.

    Many have called `The Art of War' a Chinese version of Machievalli's `The Prince." Both books provide a warrior/prince/manager/CEO with a way to think about problems and come up with dynamic solutions. This translation provides the work of Sun Tzu in a good translation, not great, but only good.

    Another positive aspect of this book is that it doesn't define what each passage means. It lets the reader determine the meaning and personally apply it to their life and situation.

    Give it a read, Sun Tzu does not disappoint and decide for yourself - what Sun Tzu wanted the reader to understand - don't be forced, as some books do, to allow them to tell you what Sun Tzu meant.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Manuals don't expand your thinking... This is not a Manual, May 13, 2001
    The reason those in the field of Business should read this book is NOT because it is a manual of sorts for strategies and tactics relating to 'Business'. To make that assumption is erroneous, and to dismiss the book because that assumption does not hold is an even bigger mistake.

    As a manual for whatever conflict you are applying the book to, the most good it will do for you is to remind you of something you may have overlooked, or some better alternative solution that you may not have thought of.

    The book's true value lies in its ability to inspire elegant, simple, and practical solutions to a problem that may seem complex. Through reading Sun Tzu's solutions to the problem of war, your way of thinking about problems (hopefully) will naturally become more enlightened by example. In 500 BC, Sun Tzu was already thinking the nowadays cliche - 'out of the box'. His final and utmost tactic to war was to avoid it.

    Is the Art of War applicable to modern warfare as a manual of tactics? Sure, if only minimally. Is the Art of War applicable as rare literature that embodies problem solving, practicality, and contextual thinking? Amen.

    So to those seeking a good manual, go elsewhere. But to those who are able to gain intellectually from such readings: Don't miss out. ... Read more


    15. The Next Decade: Where We've Been . . . and Where We're Going
    by George Friedman
    Hardcover
    list price: $27.95 -- our price: $16.33
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0385532946
    Publisher: Doubleday
    Sales Rank: 5174
    Average Customer Review: 4.0 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    The author of the acclaimed New York Times bestseller The Next 100 Years now focuses his geopolitical forecasting acumen on the next decade and the imminent events and challenges that will test America and the world, specifically addressing the skills that will be required by the decade’s leaders.

    The next ten years will be a time of massive transition. The wars in the Islamic world will be subsiding, and terrorism will become something we learn to live with. China will be encountering its crisis. We will be moving from a time when financial crises dominate the world to a time when labor shortages will begin to dominate. The new century will be taking shape in the next decade.

    In The Next Decade, George Friedman offers readers a pro­vocative and endlessly fascinating prognosis for the immedi­ate future. Using Machiavelli’s The Prince as a model, Friedman focuses on the world’s leaders—particularly the American president—and with his trusted geopolitical insight analyzes the complex chess game they will all have to play. The book also asks how to be a good president in a decade of extraordinary challenge, and puts the world’s leaders under a microscope to explain how they will arrive at the decisions they will make—and the consequences these actions will have for us all.
    ... Read more


    16. The Next 100 Years: A Forecast for the 21st Century
    by George Friedman
    Paperback
    list price: $15.95 -- our price: $10.85
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0767923057
    Publisher: Anchor
    Sales Rank: 2187
    Average Customer Review: 3.6 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    A fascinating, eye-opening and often shocking look at what lies ahead for the U.S. and the world from one of our most incisive futurists.
     
    In his thought-provoking new book, George Friedman, founder of STRATFOR—the preeminent private intelligence and forecasting firm—focuses on what he knows best, the future. Positing that civilization is at the dawn of a new era, he offers a lucid, highly readable forecast of the changes we can expect around the world during the twenty-first century all based on his own thorough analysis and research. For example, The U.S.-Jihadist war will be replaced by a new cold war with Russia; China’s role as a world power will diminish; Mexico will become an important force on the geopolitical stage; and new technologies and cultural trends will radically alter the way we live (and fight wars). Riveting reading from first to last, The Next 100 Years is a fascinating exploration of what the future holds for all of us.

    For continual, updated analysis and supplemental material, go to www.Stratfor.com
    ... Read more

    Reviews

    5-0 out of 5 stars Predictio ad Absurdum, February 26, 2009
    Although I am a large fan of America's Secret War and respect Mr. Friedman's logical thinking and intelligence, this book is an undertaking so far beyond the capability of man -trying to outline how the next 100 years of history will look- that even though it started off captivating it ultimately left me feeling like the whole thing was a fool's errand. It's not that the author is illogical or a nutcase as some of the negative reviewers have suggested, it's just that there's no way to meaningfully try to predict the simply unpredictable, regardless of the complexity of your analysis. And as the author stretches his future history farther and farther away from the present it simply becomes an implausibility on top of an implausibility on top of another implausibility to the point that any value the reader could derive nearly evaporates and I wish I had spent my time reading actual history.

    Of course the author believes some rough prediction of the future is possible based on trends analysis, an understanding of strategic nature, and other such information. I immediately concede that trying to predict the future is not only necessary as a basis for security planning but can be done profitably over maybe 10 years, 20 at the extreme, but only if you build in a huge amount of risk management / "reserve" into your planning results to account for the inevitable unexpected. Thus my critique is simply with the overly ambitious timeline of the author rather than the endeavor itself.

    There are some positives of the book which were informative and argue in favor of reading perhaps the first half for pertinent information and analysis. This information revolves around such things as brief overviews of European history and it's rise to power, a brief and plausible (though not necessarily entirely convincing) theory of a cyclical nature of American politics/economics/history, explanations of Russia's geostrategic challenge and how it has historically approached it, global demographics (birth rates declining, the reasons why they are declining and the possible results) and some highlights of the Chinese economy and political system in addition to some other fascinating minor topics. Frankly these topics could have easily formed the basis for an excellent book that tries to project what they could mean over a more modest timeframe, which coupled with Mr. Friedman's direct and straight to the point writing style would have been well worth it. But beyond this the book is more interesting as a work of science fiction than a source of illumination or fuel for strategic analysis.

    Even over the relatively strong first half of the book or so there were some things that struck me as cautionary flags with regards to the author's conclusions. Mr. Friedman is Bismarckian to a very high degree, and pretty much limits his assumptions of state behavior to each state trying to enforce a balance of power amongst all other states within its means. There is seemingly no consideration of moral factors, such as alignment of like minded cultures or political/economic systems because they are like minded, in his analysis. His explanation of US grand strategy culminates in what strikes me, as an active duty US Navy Officer, as incongruous. (Which I can't figure since he has close military ties and his son is also in the military.) He essentially claims that US grand strategy is to ensure dominance of the oceans, which is correct but only a single facet of a much more variegated and complex animal. But in his analysis of how this grand strategy has influenced American action he tries to explain that this has motivated America to intervene in Kosovo and Iraq, i.e. to forestall an eventual Eurasian power from building a Navy that can challenge ours! Serbia and Al-Qaeda seemed pretty far from that goal to provide the clarifying rational of American behavior, and this explanation fails to account why we are doing nothing to forestall Chinese and Indian naval developments, and why the previous CNO and current CJCS, Adm. Mike Mullen, launched the "1,000 ship Navy" designed to reduce the need for enlarging the US Navy size by leveraging closer ties with allied nations' navies and developing their naval capabilities synergistically. He also claims that as part of our strategy of preventing a dominant Eurasian continental power we went into Iraq to intentionally de-stabilize central Asia. Again, this flies completely in the face of my entire personal experience in the military, as so many of our forces are working themselves to the bone to try to re-stabilize the region away from weak and antagonistic states that allowed the growth of radical Islam to stronger, more functioning entities that can integrate better with the world and root out Islamic fundamentalism on its home territory. Such a change requires a period of instability to go from a "bad" regime to a "good" one, but that necessary instability is a daunting obstacle being actively tackled and not a goal. (Whether what we are doing is a pipe dream or not is an entirely different matter, but I personally find his explanation of our current strategy simply false, if not quixotic.) Instead it is the overtly stated belief of the US strategic community that it is exactly instability and/or weak autocratic based regimes that causes groups like Al-Qaeda to operate. Other concerns I have with his analysis are that Iran, especially a nuclear Iran, makes virtually no appearance, nor does India. Also, in my subjective opinion, he completely under-rates the strength and staying power of radical Islam essentially claiming that is already defeated and won't even be a factor beyond the mid 2010's, and thus he more or less ignores it.

    And although it is probably ridiculous to critique an absurdity, there were some issues I had with his analysis of the period of the 2040's and beyond. He envisions an American space based strategy with three very large (i.e. hundreds to thousands of crewmembers) space stations he calls "battle stars" forming its core. Each would be a command and control node as well as being armed with directed energy and kinetic weapons, and he claims that they will be built under the assumption that they are invulnerable. Yet given the delicate nature of lightweight space structures (in order to be able to get them into space at an affordable cost) and the relative ease of anti-satellite weapons to wreak massive damage on such a system cheaply, his assumption that the US will think they are invulnerable flies completely in the face of a technological reality that is already widely recognized in the US space community. Last, he also envisions hypersonic aircraft providing close air support for ground forces, which is frankly ridiculous. There is more I could quibble with his far out year predictions, but honestly what would be the point?

    An odd book. Mr. Friedman has some formidable strengths that shone brilliantly in America's Secret War, and glimmer here and there in the Next 100 Years, but beyond the midway point the book sadly devolves into the absurd.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Is This How It Will Go?, January 27, 2009
    When one takes into account the staggering advances that took place in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, it is a brave forecaster who would even attempt to predict the course of our (still relatively) new century. George Friedman undertakes this task in "The Next 100 Years".

    Friedman opens by taking the reader through the twentieth century at twenty-year intervals, showing how the concerns in any given time period are quickly forgotten and replaced by new concerns. This prepares the reader to see that the twenty-first century will also be anything but static, either, as America will not be facing the same set of challenges by 2020 as we did on September 11, 2001, and will be dealing with many different issues as the century progresses.

    The author is a very incisive thinker, relaying stunning insight after stunning insight in demonstrating how we arrived at where we are now, with Europe having been supplanted by America as the world's focal point.

    Friedman contends that, far from declining (as many fear), America is just beginning its rise. The century will be characterized, he predicts, by regional powers attempting to form coalitions to limit American power, and America attempting to prevent the formation of such coalitions. This will ultimately result at mid-century in a war that will have many similarities with World War II--the war will begin with a surprise attack on a key American military target, will be fought against a familiar foe, will result in the development of stunning new technologies, and will be followed by a new golden age redolent of the one following World War II.

    This book also takes a look at the worldwide population bust--policy debates in American politics will be driven in part by debates about the number of immigrants needed as a result of the bust. The author asserts that our politics operates in fifty-year cycles, and that both transition points of American politics in the twenty-first century will be driven by immigration. One of the predictions in the book is almost made as an aside--the author is really hanging his neck out on the line, since we will be able to see in not 20 or 50 years, but within the next two years whether the author is correct in his prediction about how much President Obama will be able to roll back the basic policies that President Reagan put in place in the early 1980s.

    The book closes by examining some of the technological breakthroughs such as robots and space-based energy that will transform life later in the century, and asserts that the end of the century will be characterized by increasing disharmony with Mexico over the American Southwest.

    Anyone interested in what the future might hold (that is, just about everyone) would enjoy reading "The Next 100 Years". The only regret you will have when you have finished reading it is the realization that you will not be around in 2100 to see if all of the predictions in this supremely fascinating book come to pass.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Challenging, eye opening, January 27, 2009
    George Friedman's THE NEXT 100 YEARS has a serious "wow" factor. It's going to get people talking.

    Friedman, as the chairman of Stratfor, the global intelligence firm, believes that geography, population, and the surprising way history has of confounding our expectations are all important. He also believes that conventional political analysis and forecasting "suffers from a profound failure of imagination." The convergence of these axioms leads Friedman to write a book that should flabbergast more than a few of the talking heads who populate the airwaves and cable frequencies. I would venture to guess that none of them have the intellectual wherewithal to engage his predictions knowledgeably. I guess we'll see, because no doubt Friedman will be making a splash in the press with this surprising book.

    His predictions--they will raise your eyebrows. But two things will keep you from dismissing them for their outlandishness. One, Friedman, though ambitious and writing with a strong sense of self-confidence, keeps his ego in check. (He says he'll be pleased not if he's proven right on all points, but merely if his grandkids tell him some day, "Not bad.") And two, he makes a convincing case that throughout history, almost nothing in world affairs has turned out the way common sense or the prevailing notions of smart people (or journalists) thought that it would.

    There's no arguing with any of that, though it's very easy to lose sight of.

    At the start of the book, Friedman sets the table for his forecast by reviewing the changes in the world's geopolitics during the 20th century. He shows that every 20 years or so the world turned completely on its head. Though these events in hindsight seem to us today to be ordinary and unexceptional, if not completely predictable, if forecast in their day they would have seemed astonishingly unlikely. Please bear with me here...

    In 1920, with Europe in tatters after World War I, the one thing that was sure was that peace had been forced on Germany and it would not soon lift itself up off the mat.

    By 1940, of course, Germany not only roared back, but conquered most of Europe, with Russia as an unlikely ally. Britain stood alone. There was no way Hitler could lose.

    Now to 1960. Germany is a ruin and the U.S., no world power at all in 1940, was contending only with the Soviets for world domination. The U.S. dominated the world's oceans and could dictate terms to its rivals, or, if it wished, just nuke them. Stalemate was the best the Soviets could hope for.

    Come 1980, the U.S. had been beaten in a war--not by the Soviet Union, but by little North Vietnam--and was widely seen as in a slow, permanent retreat, expelled from Iran and watching helplessly as the oil fields fell into Soviet hands.

    Now one more leap, to 2000. The Soviet Union had collapsed. China was communist in name only. NATO had advanced into Eastern Europe and even into the former USSR. (It was always supposed to happen the other way around!) The world was prosperous and peaceful. Everyone knew that the "end of history" was here, as considerations of war and power and realpolitik became secondary to spreading benign prosperity globally. Then came September 11, 2001, and the world turned on its head again.

    Got all that? Good. After that unsettling review of recent world history, Friedman has set the stage to unleash his considerable imaginative and rhetorical gifts in predicting the following:

    * That the U.S., which is now an adolescent power -- immature and impulsive -- will grow into the full glory of its power in the 21st century. By 2040, however, expect the unexpected. Two strong rivals will emerge to challenge us, and I probably shouldn't blow the freshness of the surprise by revealing here who Friedman believes it will be. (Just be sure, for one, not to buy real estate too close to the Rio Grande.)

    * The industrialized world is facing a dramatic population drop, which will bottom out in 2050. As a result, we're in for a severe global labor shortage. The result? Today's immigration debate will flip 180 degrees as countries actually compete for immigrant laborers.

    * Al Qaeda and the jihadist threat? They're history mostly, just a nuisance. (John Kerry was basically right in 2004.)

    * Ditto environmental problems and energy crises: a single technological breakthrough, space-based solar power, will change everything.

    * In the 21st century, minerals will become scarce on earth. Mining operations on the moon will be significant.

    * The art of war is moving into orbit, and a robust space industry will develop around massive new expenditures by the U.S. and other countries.

    * The U.S. will be challenged by some surprising new powers. Hint: you might want to start following news from Warsaw, Mexico City, and Istanbul a little more closely.

    And so on. The book reads very accessibly and the argument at each turn is not hard to follow. The book is not at all academic or full of the jargon you might expect. There's a startling insight on every other page. By the end of it, you realize that you're a complete fool if you take any course of global events for granted.

    Remember when it looked like the Berlin Wall was a permanent fixture in East Berlin? The only constant in the world is a lack of constancy. (Where have you gone, Joe DiMaggio?) We are, all of us, in for a lifetime of surprises. Friedman humbly takes a shot at forecasting the likeliest of them in a challenging and easy-to-read book.

    You won't lack for conversation at your next lunch date if you spend an hour or so with this book. But read it quickly, because you don't want to be the fourth person in your circle of acquaintances to go around saying that war with Turkey lies in America's future. (Okay, I blew a surprise there, but that's what happens when you're lucky enough to get hold of a review copy, and the book has more than a few of them.)

    5-0 out of 5 stars Enlightening exercise in Machiavellian realpolitik, February 4, 2009
    Staying true to famed Stratfor's reputation for free from moralizing righteousness view of world events, its CEO George Friedman's book considers a plausible future scenario through a prism of almost certain US superiority in this century and efforts to impose a simple reality that would serve its national interests - no united Eurasian power. Those interests are nothing new to anybody who is familiar with British continental foreign policy of last several centuries, which US has adopted upon taking over the mantle of the dominant world power. A number of other commentators (S. Huntington, Z. Brzezinski) espoused that principle as the prerogative for maintaining long term preeminence. But, unlike the aforementioned ideologically driven works, Friedman's general position toward confrontation between US and contending countries is one of the expected defense of each power's national interests.

    The scenario of Russia's collapse, however unlikely it might seem now, is certainly within the realm of something plausible (think of a very powerful Austro-Hungarian Empire at the start of previous century). The uncertainty of actual realization of that scenario does not diminish the value of the book or its insights. The world with one superpower is by default not a stable arrangement in the long run (short of outright world unification - something left for other centuries), thus dynamic powers of the next 30-40 years will have to deal with a direct threat to their resource lifelines posed by US Navy and space dominance. Ensuring frictions are guaranteed. With mostly land power (USSR/Russia) another Cold War is a likely scenario, but with naturally maritime powers (chosen to be Turkey and Japan) a scenario for direct confrontation is already provided by recent history.

    In my view the book should not be treated as prophetic. It is an illuminating exercise in application of basic Machiavellian principal of statecraft - keeping your potential competitors from becoming too powerful. US did it superbly during Cold War of yesterday. It will follow the same trodden path in the world of tomorrow, while the assortment of rising powers might be different, just as Germany was even more heterogeneous in 1860ies compared to China and India of today, but became the main challenger of the world order 50 years later. The choice of Poland, Turkey and Japan as rising regional powers is not arbitrary, since those are the countries that would stand to benefit directly from the considered scenario of Russian collapse and chaos in China. To those living in the not too distant future the struggle on all sides will be sugar coated as a struggle for something with the pretense for high moral grounds as it happened abundantly during Cold War (from spread of democracy to spread of social equality). One of the book's themes is that the underlying motivations for all the events are and will be driven by nothing else, but conflicting self preservation interests of all the parties involved.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Thoughtful Geopolitical Scenarios Developed 70 Years into the Future, March 9, 2009
    No one can forecast what the weather will be next week in most parts of the world, why would anyone think that forecasting what nations will do in detail over 70 years is possible? George Friedman doesn't think it's possible either, but the exercise presents the opportunity to identify sources of potential future conflicts and alliances on the geopolitical stage. Thinking about those issues is well worth considering. An ounce of prevention may just help avoid tons of regret in some cases.

    George Friedman believes that considerations of potential military defense and offense, access to needed raw materials and markets, demographics, political strengths and weaknesses, technology, and national economic interests can be combined to imagine how future leaders will see their situations and how well they will be able to handle old and new challenges vis-�-vis their neighbors and competitors. From those sources, he identifies factors that will probably be important which include:

    1. Increasing importance of having access to shipping via the oceans due to ever-expanding global trade.

    2. Continued U.S. dominance of the oceans.

    3. Political and social weaknesses in China and Russia that will cause those nations to weaken and fragment.

    4. Decline in population size in developed countries requiring pro-immigration strategies to stay competitive.

    5. Emergence of space-based warfare and energy generation to shift the basis of national competition.

    6. Robotics replacing less-skilled workers throughout the world creating a wave of unemployment.

    7. Aggressive geographical expansions of influence by nations which are bounded by weak countries.

    8. A continued dominance by the United States except in controlling the regions in the country that are filled with Mexican-Americans.

    As a result, he projects an end to armed conflicts between Muslims and Americans on religious grounds; a new cold war with Russia; fragmentation of China's economic power and military strength; the rise of regional power in nations like Turkey, Japan, and Poland; a space-based war aimed at the United States by Japan and Turkey; the rise of space-based energy as the economic underpinning of prosperity; and a civil crisis in the Southwestern U.S.

    Who knows if these things will happen? They could.

    I felt that the main weakness in his argument was failing to consider the possible development of a strong regional block involving both North and South America over the next 20 years. Such a block would have tremendous access to technology, resources, positive demographics, and be easier to keep secure than trying to project power around the world. With such a strong base, many of the issues that concern Mr. Friedman about U.S. interests would be considerably less pressing. If the U.S. were not as aggressive in Europe, the Middle East, and Asia, some of the conflicts described in this book would be less likely to occur.

    I was also surprised to see that the book doesn't make much of Africa as a source of future geopolitical challenges. With rapid population growth expected in a large population and lots of valuable resources at stake, you can certainly build a case that competition for African resources can lead to a lot of geopolitical instability.

    Historians are fond of saying that history repeats itself. You can see an example in Germany being involved in playing a major role in the early stages of the first and second world wars. Mr. Friedman takes the repetition concept and applies it by assuming that Japan will repeat a Pearl-Harbor-like sneak attack on the United States. I think he could just as easily argue that Germany will start another European war, but he doesn't think the demographics favor that.

    Ultimately, this book assumes that nations won't get any better at resolving their problems peacefully in ways to produce more social and economic benefits for everyone. I hope that assumption is mistaken.


    4-0 out of 5 stars A FASCINATING, DISTURBING LOOK FORWARD AT WHAT COULD BE, January 27, 2009
    Four and a half FASCINATING Stars! Highly Engrossing!! Futurist author George Friedman looks back at the last 100 years in a great geo-political analysis of where we have been as England, Germany, Russia, and the USA engage in strategic political swordmanship over the benchmarks of 1900, 1920, 1940, 1960, 1980, 2000, and the fateful date of Sept 11, 2001: presented in a way and with an overview that may have escaped some of us. In many ways this is an expansion of The Future of War: Power, Technology and American World Dominance in the Twenty-first Century written by George and Meredith Friedman, but this book is much wider in scope and depth.

    The author then looks out into the future over the period of 100 years from now, surveying everything from Atlantic Europe, the USA, "the Soviet Empire", the Islamic world, earthquakes, Soviet successor states, the coming "Texas Rebellion", Mexico, the Eurasian "Poacher Paradise", socio-policital trends, population shifts, and far beyond. Reading almost like science fiction, the author paints a disturbing picture of the future of the world and the USA in particular. But make no mistake, this is not your 'run of the mill' conspiracy book but a deep study of past trends and future projections. One may not like what he projects on a macro-level, but one look at where we are today in 2009 should dispel any doubts that things may change radically into a world that none of us believed possible and far from our benefit as a nation and world leader. Buckle up for a Wild Ride into our possible future. Definitely recommended!! Four and a half POSSIBLE Stars. (This review is based on an eBook digital download, 394 pages with 28 geo-political illustrations)

    1-0 out of 5 stars Smart man, but dead wrong about Asia, April 11, 2009

    Everyone praises "America's Secret War" for Friedman's in-depth knowledge of both the U.S. military, and 25 years experience in studying Eurasia. However, it is a far leap to predict the next hundred years and expect to be taken seriously by applying strict geopolitical ideology to the world to the absence of any and all other significant factors and historical "twists of fate," as in a rogue nuclear weapon/s?

    Either it is of no interest to him, or he has far less area of expertise in Asia itself, but to write off China in one small, vague, chapter is an enormous disservice, completely without any supporting data that by 2020 China will "destabilize." In 2008-9 the entire world banking system "destabilized" to the surprise of many, and yet China's did not, has not; and possesses the largest liquid assets on the planet, of which they have invested heavily in U.S. Treasury bonds. His lack of any mention of the New World's banking was an obvious oversight.

    Additionally, his premise that, to summarize, Japan will again expand as it did prior to WWII and will again take over parts of Mainland China is laughable. China has the largest standing military in the world. No, they do not possess much of an navy, but it has more than enough aircraft to do the exact reverse, which is physically invade Japan to put an immediate stop to Japanese aggression. Boots on the ground are quite cheap, and China has lots and lots of boots. And the money to keep them there.

    Does Friedman believe Nanking has forgotten? China is an excellent observer of other cultures' mistakes. When the Chinese government converted and moves into a capitalist driven economy, they did not have the problems and horrors Russia had, because they were astute observers.

    China does not have a history of aggression toward other countries (if one excludes Tibet), but I live in China, and I have no fear now or in the future that Japan will ever be able to "convince" the Chinese of their need for Chinese materials and labor should be satisfied with a Japanese presence. Not in this century and not in the next.

    And, finally, it is as if Africa and India have no import in the next 100 years. He does not even bother to mention them.

    4-0 out of 5 stars The Dawn of a New American Age?, February 10, 2009
    I love coming across well-articulated viewpoints that challenge my own. It's almost always a win-win situation when this happens.

    If I am convinced of the new point of view on its merits, then my worldview has been enhanced. My stance has moved from a position that is less correct to one that is more correct. If I remain unconvinced, on the other hand, then my original viewpoint has been strengthened... stress-tested and found worthy, as it were. And either way, new layers of nuance and subtlety are always a plus.

    My views were certainly challenged - and yours will be too - by the stance in George Friedman's new book, "The Next 100 Years: A Forecast for the 21st Century."

    The book pulls no punches. There are predictions in here that will surprise your socks off. Just consider some of the timeline bullets from the front cover:

    * 2020: China Fragments.

    * 2050: Global War Between U.S., Turkey, Poland, and Japan - The New Great Powers.

    * 2080: Space-Based Energy Powers Earth.

    * 2100: Mexico Challenges U.S.

    If your initial reaction is anything similar to mine, it runs along the lines of "What?!? Is this guy smoking banana peels?"

    Most assuredly he is not. Friedman is the founder and CEO of Stratfor, an outfit billed as "the world's leading private intelligence and forecasting company." Geopolitics is Friedman's game... and it's a game he takes very seriously.

    Expect the Unexpected

    Conventional thinkers dismiss wildly unexpected views out of hand. For Friedman, that's the whole point. "Expect the unexpected" is a geopolitical forecaster's mantra. This point is hammered home in the introduction of the book, in which the reader is taken on a series of 20-year jumps through the 20th century. With each jump, the landscape looks radically different.

    Friedman's point in highlighting these radical landscape shifts is not that some mystical cycle kicks in like clockwork every two decades. It's merely that, when it comes to geopolitics and major world events, conventional wisdom is almost always wrong. The present order of things is no guide as to how things will look two decades out.

    China as Backwater?

    Friedman's views on China are particularly eye-opening.

    "I don't share the view that China is going to be a major world power," he writes. "I don't even believe it will hold together as a unified country... China is important, however, because it appears to be the most likely global challenger in the near term - at least in the minds of others."

    You need extremely powerful arguments to back statements like this one, and Friedman has them. He looks at China from a number of angles many others have not considered - and his arguments make sense. China has a number of geographical and cultural hurdles that will prove very tough to overcome.

    Many point to China's 30 years of breakneck growth. If Friedman is right in his view that "30 years is not a very long time" and that China will revert back to isolationist trend, the world will look very different ten years on than many of us expected.

    Friedman may well be wrong, of course... but he isn't just stirring the pot for the sake of being controversial. His logic is coherent.

    Oceans Trump All

    Take the emphasis on naval power, for example. One of the reasons Friedman expects the U.S. to dominate is because of America's absolute dominance of the world's oceans.

    "The United States Navy controls all of the oceans in the world," Friedman opines. "Whether it's a junk in the south China Sea, a dhow off the African coast, a tanker in the Persian Gulf, or a cabin cruiser in the Caribbean, every ship in the world moves under the eyes of American satellites in space and its movement is guaranteed - or denied - at will by the US Navy."

    In the European Age, transatlantic trade was the key to wealth and prosperity. But then, closer to the end of the 20th century, something momentous happened. Transpacific trade - that is to say, trade across the Pacific Ocean, as opposed to the Atlantic - began to rise up.

    This shift heavily favors the United States as the only great power with coastal access to both oceans - Atlantic and Pacific. This factors huge in the geopolitical calculus that sits at the heart of Friedman's work.

    What's more, Friedman argues, the United States does not have to win wars. Because America has already established global geopolitical dominance, the goal is to disrupt any and all attempts of other regional powers to form. If this means fomenting an expensive conflict that America appears to "lose," then that's fine - because the strategic goal is not to win, but merely to keep competitive alliances from forming.

    America as Adolescent

    Friedman further compares the United States to an "adolescent" - still young and belligerent, not yet confident in its own ability to project and wield power.

    This moody teenager mindset explains a lot when it comes to thinking about US foreign policy: the undercurrents of extreme insecurity interwoven with brash outbursts of confidence... the clumsy willingness to stomp around like a bull in a China shop (no pun intended)... and so on.

    It is truly a unique point of view. America in the very early stages of influence on the world stage, rather than the days of twilight? Who would have thought? It's a hallmark of US culture, Friedman points out, to be deeply insecure about certain things - while at the same time harboring that deep streak of brashness.

    To his credit, Friedman is the only analyst I've come across who has made a serious effort to consider military power, alongside economic power, in his forecasts.

    And Friedman has thought about the economics too. In "The Next 100 Years" he makes the further argument that America is vastly underpopulated yet growing (whereas other competitors are shrinking) and that certain aspects of agricultural production and economic resilience will also make a real long-run difference.

    Guaranteed To Make You Think

    There are plenty of other crazy-yet-plausible assertions in this book that are guaranteed to make you think. (Poland and Turkey as two of the next "great powers?" Wow! And there are even wilder ideas than that...)

    I don't embrace Friedman's ideas without reservation. But "The Next 100 Years" has certainly made me think, and think hard, on some of the more popular forecast notions I've long entertained.

    3-0 out of 5 stars Not as good as I expected, March 20, 2009
    I read the negative comments here before I read the book. I was certain I would find Friedman a lot more convincing than they portrayed him. I've had to back off from that opinion.

    I don't agree with others that Friedman is jingoistic. (On the contrary, he has some rather unflattering things to say about the country; things you wouldn't expect to hear from a Republican.) Indeed, America really is the preeminent power on the planet right now. It's hard to see how that power will wane much very soon. One doesn't have to be jingoistic to imagine that the U.S. will hold onto power for a long time. Things may not turn out that way, but it's certainly not unreasonable to guess that it might.

    In fact, I found Friedman's progression plausible--at least up to the 2050s. (Although, I've got to say that the idea of China and Russia just falling apart strained my credulity.) Then, in my opinion, the whole thing takes a nosedive. The United States has overwhelming superiority in every way. Our "battle stars" put us so far ahead of the rest of the world that we're virtually unchallengeable. Then what happens? Japan throws rocks at them from the Moon. Just like that, they're all gone. Then Japan sends in hypersonic planes and virtually wipes out our ability to project forces beyond our borders.

    So, we're beaten, right? Hardly! Somehow, within the space of two years, we're recovered our strength to the point where we completely dominate the coalition between Japan and Turkey--the only two countries with the power to challenge us. We come to the aid of Poland and handily whup up on the Turks and so squelch Japan that the rest of the world has to consent to let us and us alone use space militarily.

    Frankly, it sounds like some pretty awful science fiction. (And I should know. I've written enough awful science fiction!)

    And I think I'll just pass on the likelihood that Mexico is going to become powerful enough to be a legitimate threat to its northern neighbor late in the century. (Although, frankly, that's a step toward a return to plausibility after the war of 2050 thing.)

    But I need to be more humble. I know all too well I haven't done the thinking on these things that Friedman has; and I certainly don't have the training or experience. In a debate, I imagine he would mop the floor with me. Still, a lot of this book seems inordinately farfetched.

    But it does get you thinking, and I suppose that's the point, really. It would help if Friedman would include footnotes and a bibliography so that we could check some of his foundational facts for ourselves.

    2-0 out of 5 stars Selective use of theory and statistics, June 30, 2009
    This book has gotten a lot of hype and criticism. A world in which Mexico is a major power? China and India ignored? Climate change magically solved? Europe falling back into warfare? I read the book to see if the criticisms were justified. Unfortunately, they are. I doubt this book predicts much of the future, or even identifies the countries we should look out for.

    The book uses statistics selectively and not very convincingly. Sometimes he cites numbers without providing the proper context. For example, he hypes the fact that Mexico has the 15th (now closer to 14th) largest economy in the world as suggesting we should take it seriously. What he doesn't tell you is that this ranking puts Mexico's economy slightly behind Canada and only a bit ahead of Australia's - neither of which are rising world powers. Yet, when it comes to China's economy (which is the 3rd largest and rising still), he demeans it by saying it still is nowhere near Japan's. In fact, there is no indication that Mexico's economy, despite the advantage of being located to the largest market in the world, is poised to grow anything at the rate of China's. Likewise, he stresses the fact that Japan's economy is the second largest in the world, but conveniently forgets to mention that it is stagnating and declining relative to China (especially with the Global Financial Crisis).

    The central flaw is Friedman's traditional realist/geopolitics framework of analysis. This is a very simplistic way of looking at the world and assumes that countries are "black boxes" with permanent interests. Thus, Friedman does not believe that individual leaders, political ideologies, or internal dynamics matter. In fact, Friedman explicitly states that leaders don't really make stupid mistakes in foreign policy. One only needs to look at recent history to see how poorly this predicts international relations. According to Friedman's style of analysis, no matter who was elected president, the U.S. would likely have invaded Iraq. Yet, it's hard to see the war in Iraq as anything buy a stupid mistake that would not have happened if Gore had been elected. Friedman says the U.S. invaded Iraq to prevent the rise of a hegemonic Muslim state in the Middle East, but the invasion simply abolished Iran's main enemy and allowed Iran to exert more influence in the region. That seems like a mistake and doesn't fit Friedman's explanation of the U.S. geopolitical rationale for the war. My point isn't to debate the Iraq War, but to show how Friedman's tools of analysis don't work well enough to predict 100 years into the future, much less 5 years.

    This means that Friedman ignores other important predictors of geopolitical power - the state's power internally to enforce its laws and policies, the educational and skill level of its people, etc. Strong governments often become strong geopolitical powers, while states that can't even control their own people or are racked by civil wars don't rise to greatness. Obviously a government's capacity to exert internal control can change over time, but it does seem to be something developed early. Likewise, a more educated populace with experience running businesses is more likely to fuel the economic dynamism that fuels growth and hence power. For example, even though countries like Japan and Germany seemed devastated after World War II, (since unification) they had strong governments and a skilled populace. Along these lines, Friedman ignores the fact that Mexico's government can't even control its own borders, drug gangs, still faces internal insurgent groups, and has trouble collecting tax revenue. Yes, it's possible that Mexico could undergo a transformation, but there is not evidence that this is likely. Friedman bases his analysis almost exclusively on the fact that Mexico is located on the border of the U.S., which simply isn't enough to lead to a great power. By contrast, there are signs that business leaders in India and China are forming companies that can compete globally and producing educated workers. While both have problems enforcing laws, neither face rampant drug gangs that openly defy government authority.

    This book may get a few things right, but is too limited by the "geopolitical" frame of analysis that ignores dynamic trends, sate capacity, and education. Sadly, this type of "geography is destiny" analysis is becoming more popular. You're better off reading Fareed Zakaria's The Post-American World and other books about the near future to understand what we're likely to see over the next 25 years. ... Read more


    17. The Poisoner's Handbook: Murder and the Birth of Forensic Medicine in Jazz Age New York
    by Deborah Blum
    Hardcover
    list price: $25.95 -- our price: $17.13
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 1594202435
    Publisher: Penguin Press HC, The
    Sales Rank: 1576
    Average Customer Review: 4.5 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    Pulitzer Prize-winning science writer Deborah Blum follows New York City's first forensic scientists to discover a fascinating Jazz Age story of chemistry and detection, poison and murder.

    Deborah Blum, writing with the high style and skill for suspense that is characteristic of the very best mystery fiction, shares the untold story of how poison rocked Jazz Age New York City. In The Poisoner's Handbook Blum draws from highly original research to track the fascinating, perilous days when a pair of forensic scientists began their trailblazing chemical detective work, fighting to end an era when untraceable poisons offered an easy path to the perfect crime.

    Drama unfolds case by case as the heroes of The Poisoner's Handbook-chief medical examiner Charles Norris and toxicologist Alexander Gettler-investigate a family mysteriously stricken bald, Barnum and Bailey's Famous Blue Man, factory workers with crumbling bones, a diner serving poisoned pies, and many others. Each case presents a deadly new puzzle and Norris and Gettler work with a creativity that rivals that of the most imaginative murderer, creating revolutionary experiments to tease out even the wiliest compounds from human tissue. Yet in the tricky game of toxins, even science can't always be trusted, as proven when one of Gettler's experiments erroneously sets free a suburban housewife later nicknamed "America's Lucretia Borgia" to continue her nefarious work.

    From the vantage of Norris and Gettler's laboratory in the infamous Bellevue Hospital it becomes clear that killers aren't the only toxic threat to New Yorkers. Modern life has created a kind of poison playground, and danger lurks around every corner. Automobiles choke the city streets with carbon monoxide; potent compounds, such as morphine, can be found on store shelves in products ranging from pesticides to cosmetics. Prohibition incites a chemist's war between bootleggers and government chemists while in Gotham's crowded speakeasies each round of cocktails becomes a game of Russian roulette. Norris and Gettler triumph over seemingly unbeatable odds to become the pioneers of forensic chemistry and the gatekeepers of justice during a remarkably deadly time. A beguiling concoction that is equal parts true crime, twentieth-century history, and science thriller, The Poisoner's Handbook is a page-turning account of a forgotten New York.

    ... Read more

    Reviews

    5-0 out of 5 stars A Genuine, But Highly Entertaining, Poisoner's Handbook, December 31, 2009

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    I love reading about famous crimes, medical oddities, and cases solved by forensics. This book has them all, and is every bit as entertainingly well-written as my old favorite, THE MEDICAL DETECTIVES. by Berton Roueche.

    Better yet, the title, THE POISONER'S HANDBOOK, is not just hyperbole. In describing famous New York City crimes committed with poison, the author discusses the chemical makeup, toxic effects, and early-20th-century sources of (1) chloroform, (2) methyl alcohol, (3) cyanide, (4) arsenic, (5) mercury, (6) carbon monoxide, (7) radium, and (8) thallium.

    In reading this book, you will probably find that there is a lot you thought you knew but didn't really know about well-known poisons frequently encountered in mystery novels and television shows. Did you think that fast-acting cyanide delivers a "one whiff, you're done" death? Think again! Did you think that only Skid Row bums drank wood alcohol during Prohibition? Not so! Did you know that Marie Curie died of radiation poisoning? Probably, but did you know exactly how radium works in the body to produce aplastic anemia and death?

    In reading this book, you will also learn about pioneering forensics efforts that required the grinding up of large samples of brain and organ tissue prior to laboratory testing. (In the early 20th century, testing was done with "wet" chemistry; today it is done with "dry" chemistry that only requires smears for testing.) The testing itself required many time-consuming steps and tricky procedures. Some of the testing involved tissue samples that were retained in room-temperature containers for weeks and months.

    The book also tells the story of three great pioneers in forensics science--NYC medical examiner Charles Norris, his chief chemist, Alexander Gettler, and New Jersey medical examiner Harrison Martland. Norton and Gettler lobbied tirelessly against Prohibition, which caused countless deaths from bad booze (renatured industrial alcohol), and against other toxic commercial products sold for hair removal, better-looking skin, and generally improved health. Martland did important research into the effects of radium on factory workers who painted radium watch dials, and also lobbied against the sale of radium-laced health elixirs, such as Radithor. Some of these toxic products actually worked--until they succeeded in poisoning the user.

    Although the book is an easy read, it is well-researched, and includes footnotes describing the author's sources. (My advance review copy did not include footnote numbers within the text, but presumably the numbers will appear in the final printed book.) The book also includes a useful bibliography of scholarly works on forensic toxicology.

    5-0 out of 5 stars The Birth of Forensic Medicine Against a Backdrop of Prohibition, January 15, 2010

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    Police work has always included an element of an arms race between criminals trying to outwit authorities and get away with a crime and police trying to prevent this from happening. This battle of wits is especially true in the case of murder. Science in the latter part of the 1800's had exponentially added to the store of chemicals whose use could prove to be fatal to humans. Science was great at finding all sorts of new elements and chemical compounds. The problem was that science was not always good at seeing if these new discoveries were safe around people, and there was no shortage of people who were willing to explore the lethality of these new chemical. It is against this "golden age of poison" that Blum builds her history. Through the dangerous poisons (chloroform, arsenic, mercury, cyanide, radium and wood and grain alcohols) active in the early twentieth century New York City she tells the story of Charles Norris and Alexander Gettler, who are arguably the fathers of the modern Medical Examiner's office and of forensic science. Set against the backdrop of the hubbub of New York City as a growing city, a center of society and money, and as ground zero in the social experiment of Prohibition, Norris works to advance the medical examiner's office from a position of patronage to Tammany Hall to an office integral to the solving of crime and building a knowledge base for civic health information. Norris would be the driving force of change trying to build a modern department built upon science, as well as be a Cassandra warning about the coming dangers of Prohibition in terms of public health as drinkers, cut off from their normal alcohol, would turn to poisonous wood alcohol drinks, despite the government's attempts to render industrial wood alcohols poisonous (denatured). Meanwhile Gettler, the meticulous toxicologist continues experimenting to test and discover new ways to identify and test organs and tissue for the presence of poisons - the better to convict poisoners.

    Each chapter revolves around cases encountered that involved the particular poison, covering the two decades between 1915 and 1936. A recurring theme of the chapters is how society focused on the triumph of the industrial age, blasting ahead with new chemicals without worry or heed to potential health effects. Cyanide gas would be freely pumped into areas to rid buildings and ships of rats and other pests with little regard to the dangers should the gas seep up pipes to inhabited areas on the floors above, or the danger to sailors in fumigated ships that had not had the gas fully ventilated from below decks. Arsenic, mercury compounds, cyanide compounds and thallium were all generously available for purchase as rat poison, cleaning agents and for, often dubious, medicinal purposes. But what could be a benefit to society could also very quickly become deadly when used incorrectly or illicitly. Glow in the dark radium watch faces were a boon that came from necessity in World War I, but the need to `retip' the radium paint brushes by using one's lips introduced radium poisons to the factory worker's bodies, eating them from the inside out.

    It fell upon science to prove these poisonings were often deliberate, and may be a result of a crime. Toxicology searched for ways to detect even minute traces in the body after death, and to determine how long this telltale trace lingers in the body after death and burial. It was up to the medical examiner's office to take their research and package it for juries to understand in order to obtain a conviction. This took time, dedicated research and effort of Norris, Gettler and many others. Today, with crime procedure shows such as CSI the norm it is amazing to think that the structure, procedures and values of these kinds of investigations is only 60-80 years old. This book is a blend of several stories - part history, part science and part sociology. The book also points out how attempts from some areas of government to remove poisons from the lives of citizens came up against other government efforts to remove one large `poison' from people's lives only to force them to seek out even deadlier poisons in Prohibition. The result is a very readable account of the government at some of its best and its worst in regards to the safety of the public.

    5-0 out of 5 stars A CSI for the Jazz Age, January 8, 2010

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    I love true crime books. I find it fascinating to read about crimes that really happened. I know that makes me weird, but so be it.

    For a person who has similar (morbid) tastes, "The Poisoner's Handbook" perfectly fits the bill. These crimes take place in New York City during the Jazz Age. The author carefully describes various poisons, such as wood alcohol, arsenic, and radium and the various effects it had on the victims. If your knowledge of poisons is based on tv shows or movies, you will be surprised to find out a lot you (probably) didn't know already.
    As you can guess, forensic science was in its infancy at the time. This book focuses on Charles Norris, the New York City coroner, Alexander Gettler, Mr Norris' lead chemist and Harrison Martland, the New Jersey coroner. These people are for real, not like the old "Ouincy, ME" television show of long ago.
    When you see old movies of people drinking "bathtub gin" during Prohibition, it looks so carefree and fun. But it wasn't. Many deaths were caused by the "hooch" that was made from renatured industrial alcohol. It wasn't a pretty death, either. It makes me wonder why anyone would be willing to take the risk of drinking homemade booze, but plenty of people did it, I guess thinking "It won't happen to me".
    When you see what types of ingredients were in the common ordinary household items, you will wonder how anybody managed to stay alive in that type period. You think toxic products are bad now, when you read this book, you will be surprised how far (or maybe not) we have come.
    One of the more interesting sections (to me) was the part about radium. You wouldn't think of ingesting a radium laced "health elixir" now. But it was very common during that time period. It also made me think of the F. Scott Fitzgerald short story, The Diamond as Big as the Ritz. It makes me wonder what happened after the end of the story.
    I had heard the story of the radium watch factory workers from my father. I was pleasantly surprised to see it told in full in this book. It seems somebody might have thought about the possibility of poisoning in the factory workers, but apparently the company didn't realize what radium is capable of doing.
    I strongly recommend this book for any fans of true crime or the "CSI" roster of shows. It's a great read and you will learn a lot about poisons,



    1-0 out of 5 stars The Not-too-chemical Handbook, October 21, 2010
    As I started "The Poisoner's Handbook", I thought this was a great book: a fine history of modern American forensic science, told through a double biography of Norris and Gettler, two of its major founders, and illuminated with engrossing tales of murder, mayhem, and nightmarish misadventure. That thought died as soon as I started to spot the technical explanations that were uninformative, misleading, or downright wrong. Will a dozen examples do?

    p. 56: Hydrocyanic acid (HCN) is not a potent acid or corrosive; it is just about the weakest acid known. The fact that it is ferociously toxic has nothing to do with its acidic strength.

    p. 22: Chloroform is not terribly corrosive; on keratinized tissue (normal skin) it has no effect at all.

    p. 86: You cannot get anything by mixing arsenic (As), copper (Cu) and hydrogen (H2) because the first two are metals and the last is a gas that does not react spontaneously with either of them.

    p. 179: Radium (Ra) does not react with water to produce radon (Rn); it produces Rn by atomic decay.

    p. 183: Radium (Ra) does not decay to produce polonium (Po) and radon (Rn) - its atomic weight is far less than that of Po and Rn combined so it cannot produce both. It can decay to produce Rn, which then decays to produce Po.

    p. 187: Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) is not slightly acidic; as any highschooler knows, it is moderately basic.

    p. 191: There is no such thing as diethyl phlatate. (Did Blum mean diethyl phthalate? Did anyone proofread this book?)

    p. 201: Ethanol (EtOH) does not "dissolve" into acetic acid; it is converted to acetic acid by tissue enxymatic activity.

    p. 206: DDT is not an organophosphate; it contains no phosphorous at all. It is a chlorinated hydrocarbon.
    passim: Blum does not seem to realize that wood alcohol, methyl alcohol, and methanol are just three different names for the same compound, used at different times as chemical terminology became more precise over the years.

    And at least two misconversions from US weight units to metric.

    How Blum got a Pulitzer for popular science writing and a job teaching it at the university level I cannot imagine; perhaps her zoology is better than her chemistry (it would have to be much, MUCH better), but her chemistry is far too inadequate to qualify her to explain it to others.

    I propose that henceforward any book purporting to explain chemistry for the layman should be vetted by a committee of ten members randomly chosen from the American Chemical Society, before it is let loose on the unsuspecting public. Why shouldn't popular science writings be subject to the same peer review that professional writings are?

    If Blum had left out the chemistry or else got it right, this would be a four-star book; as it is, it's a one.

    5-0 out of 5 stars "This is a Poison. Warn Everyone...", December 30, 2009

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    Alexander Gettler "positively hated the idea that some poisoner off the street could outwit him." No other city in the United States in the early 1900's had a toxicology lab. Gettler was hired to design the lab and invent the methods for analyzing poisons. He was the perfect man for the job.

    "If research methods didn't exist, he would develop them himself. If a new poison or drug came on the market, he went off to a butcher shop, just around the corner from his Brooklyn home, and bought three pounds of liver."

    Poisoners during this time were hard to catch and even harder to convict in a court of law. The science of toxicology was so new that it seemed to many jurors to be nothing more than conjecture so a person guilty of poisoning could easily walk free.

    Gettler worked tirelessly at his work and his paper, "The Toxicology of Cyanide," was so thorough and accurate that it was referenced into the 21st century.

    Deborah Blum writes thoroughly about a fascinating subject. Her writing remains interesting while still including the more technical chemistry involved in toxicology.

    Blum recounts some of the more notorious cases like Typhoid Mary and introduces us to America's Lucretia Borgia, Mary Fanny Creighton, who continued to haunt Gettler for twelve years after her 'not guilty' verdict in the murder of her brother and mother-in-law.

    Or Eben M. Byers, a fifty-two year old millionaire, industrialist, athlete and social elitist, who enjoyed his health drink, Radithor while his bones were mysteriously splintering, his skin was yellowing and his kidneys failing. He drank over a thousand bottles of his health drink never imagining that the radium-based drink was his killer.

    "This is a poison. Warn Everyone." Gettler's message to doctors after realizing wood alcohol was responsible for the severe weakness and abdominal pains, vomiting, blindness, heart failure and death. Used as a substitute during Prohibition, wood alcohol often caused blindness and death.

    Wood Alcohol, radium, arsenic, mercury, carbon monoxide, ethyl alcolhol... it's a wonder anyone lived a long life with these poisons freely available and often freely dispensed.

    This is a very captivating book for the reader with an interest in science and history.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Fascinating forensics history book - sort of a "CSI NYC, the Early Years", December 28, 2009

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    Until reading this book I had never given any thought to how forensic medicine started. I had no idea that in the early 1900's our country was not as advanced as European countries in it's efforts to use science to make definitive determinations of the causes of deaths. The author begins the book by explaining that medical examiners were elected in NYC at the turn of the century, and the Tammany Hall system resulted in incompetent and corrupt medical examiners holding the office. A reform movement resulted in the establishment of an ME's office that not only operated respectably, but that undertook cutting edge research in order to come up with methods to determine if people had been poisoned. The book is arranged in chapters for the major types of poisoning of the early 1900's.

    This book does NOT read like a textbook. The author provides you with the political and social picture, and also the personalities of the various doctors who developed the tests to determine poisons as well as the vicitms and the perpetrators. One historical point I had been totally unware of was that doctors pushed for repeal of Prohibition. During prohibition there was a dramatic increase in the number of people dying due to deadly concoctions sold by bootleggers. In addition, the U.S. government required manufacturers to add some horrific chemicals to products that had alcohol in them but were not meant for drinking in an attempt to prevent people from drinking them. Alcoholics drank those products anyway, with terrrible consequences.

    One of the saddest chapters was about radium. In WW1 soldiers needed watch faces that could be read in dim light or darkness. It was discovered that radium glowed and was good for this purpose. Women in a factory in New Jersey used their mouths to wet paintbrushes they dipped into radium for painting those numbers. In addition, the factory air had a dangerously high level of radium in it. As a result, these women had heavy exposure to radium. Radiation poisoning sickened and ultimately killed them and some sued and won a settlement from their employer. There were also companies selling water containing radium as a health drink. Sadly, it wasn't until a well known and wealthy NYC man died (from consumption of radium drinks) that any effort was made to outlaw products containing this deadly substance and force companies to protect their workers from it.

    The author obviously did a lot of research for this book, and did an excellent job in providing simple but full explanations of the science. I don't give a lot of books 5 stars, but this one absolutely deserves it.

    4-0 out of 5 stars Well Researched, Well Explained Doesn't "Read Like Fiction", December 22, 2009

    Customer review from the Amazon Vine™ Program (What's this?)
    On seeing the description of this well written, extensively researched history of forensic chemistry by a Pulitzer Prize winning science journalist I was hoping that I could exercise the well-worn expression "reads like the best fiction"; instead this is a book of historical vignettes of developments in toxicology and forensic chemistry that is exquisitely researched, clearly described and placed in interesting and accurate contexts; but, in my inexpert opinion it lacks the fiction-like attributes of a scientific history like Jennet Conant's "Tuxedo Park". The writing is lucid, non-technical and interesting, and great effort has been placed in developing its scientific and historical accuracy, but the case studies and the criminal incidents which it describes in developing the context of toxicological breakthroughs do not read like mini-mysteries. I would certainly have been pleased with this excellent work if I were looking for a history of forensic chemistry describing the development of particular techniques organized around the assays developed to detect particular compounds and poisons; as I was also looking for well-developed short mysteries based around these historical developments I was slightly disappointed with this otherwise masterful work of science journalism.

    --Ira Laefsky

    5-0 out of 5 stars An excellent read, May 8, 2010
    When I first saw this book, I wasn't really sure if I wanted to read it. But, it sounded intrigueing. Now, I extremely gladd I did. It's and easy read, it flows, and you really don't want it to end. I was really sorry when I got to the end, I wanted it to continue. A good written account of the birth of Forensic Medicine and Forensic Toxicology while weaving into a story. It's great when you are reading and all of a sudden you get to say to yourself "So thats why". I did that many times and throughly enjoyed the book, it will take its place in my permanent Library.

    4-0 out of 5 stars an amazing book, April 26, 2010
    I am very interested in forensic medicine. when I read the review of Deborah Blum's new book I was intrigued and had to purchase it. This is for anyone who loves history, science and medicine and crime. As a New Yorker I had no idea that the first medical examiner was not a physician. I just assumed that position required such (it does now). I enjoy the way the chapters are organized...according to the type of poison. A good read and not terribly technical.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Immensely Entertaining and Engaging Account of Prohibition Era NYC, Murder by Poison & the Birth of Forensic Toxicology, April 22, 2010
    This book hit a home run. It took us back to NYC in the early 20th Century, combining the prevailing politics, culture and science and how it dealt with death from exposure to toxins--either in the workplace or at the hands of a murderer. Entertaining, interesting and educational, the book describes how the the NYC Medical Examiner's office evolved from being headed by a drunk political hack to being competently run by accomplished and dedicated men of science. Investigating death and disease in the workplace and baffling murders by poison challenged these men, and they responded, with nothing more than some beakers, their education and their ingenuity and determination. In the process, the science of forensic toxicology was born. Unlike the overwhelming number of examples where scientific discovery and achievement resulted from commercial motivation (which I have NO problem with), here, forensic toxicology's creation and advancement drew its motive force from the altrustic need to reveal and punish premediated murder. The author's style was excellent for the subject matter, and demonstrated a true affection for the era and the science. She described complexity in an entertaining, understandable and even folksy way, and at times, made me laugh out loud. To disclose a personal bias making this book so enjoyable to me: Over the course of my adult life, I have had the pleasure of meeting and working with a few toxicologists, and I find common characteristics--tremendous intellect, scientific curiosity and objectivity, knowledge and appreciation of past and present scientific literature, and a laser-beam focus on detail and precision. I recommend this book to anyone who likes history of scientific discovery ... Read more


    18. Young People, Ethics, and the New Digital Media: A Synthesis from the Good Play Project
    by Carrie James
    Kindle Edition
    list price: $14.00
    Asin: B0030EFOMC
    Publisher: The MIT Press
    Average Customer Review: 3.0 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    Social networking, blogging, vlogging, gaming, instant messaging, downloading music and other content, uploading and sharing their own creative work: these activities made possible by the new digital media are rich with opportunities and risks for young people. This report, part of the GoodPlay Project, undertaken by researchers at Harvard Graduate School of Education's Project Zero, investigates the ethical fault lines of such digital pursuits.

    The authors argue that five key issues are at stake in the new media: identity, privacy, ownership and authorship, credibility, and participation. Drawing on evidence from informant interviews, emerging scholarship on new media, and theoretical insights from psychology, sociology, political science, and cultural studies, the report explores the ways in which youth may be redefining these concepts as they engage with new digital media. The authors propose a model of "good play" that involves the unique affordances of the new digital media; related technical and new media literacies; cognitive and moral development and values; online and offline peer culture; and ethical supports, including the absence or presence of adult mentors and relevant educational curricula. This proposed model for ethical play sets the stage for the next part of the GoodPlay project, an empirical study that will invite young people to share their stories of engagement with the new digital media.

    The John D. and Catherine T. MacArthur Foundation Reports on Digital Media and Learning
    ... Read more

    Reviews

    3-0 out of 5 stars A Lite Intro, October 7, 2010
    The increased freedoms and means of communicating and interacting with others that has been brought about due to the technological revolution of recent decades has had an enormous impact on society. Among those who have been most affected are the young, as they tend to be predominantly the first adopters of new technologies, as well as the ones who are least rooted into the "old ways" of doing things. This state of affairs has raised a new set of challenges for all those who are concerned with that young people's well being and safety. Just recently there have been several highly publicized cases of "cyber bullying" - instances where young people have done harm to themselves due to actions of others online. However, online involvement for the most part can be a very positive experience for young people, as they are able to interact meaningfully with their peers, and safely explore social circumstances that may not be otherwise accessible to them.

    This short report brings up several of the issues mentioned above, as well as many others. Most of them are already familiar to people who have been following the latest "digital" trends, and in that regard there will be very little new and path breaking material in this document. I was hoping to get some new insights from the latest research in this field, but there are hardly any new empirical findings that are presented here. Most of the "case studies" that are dealt with are actually just hypothetical situations that are used to highlight certain points or potential sources of problem in the digital world. They may have been based on actual real-world experiences, but that is nowhere clearly spelled out. This report is good in that it highlights and brings to one's attention some important issues, but otherwise it is rather thin on substance.
    ... Read more


    19. You Are Not a Gadget: A Manifesto
    by Jaron Lanier
    Hardcover
    list price: $24.95 -- our price: $16.47
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0307269647
    Publisher: Knopf
    Sales Rank: 2233
    Average Customer Review: 4.2 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    Jaron Lanier, a Silicon Valley visionary since the 1980s, was among the first to predict the revolutionary changes the World Wide Web would bring to commerce and culture. Now, in his first book, written more than two decades after the web was created, Lanier offers this provocative and cautionary look at the way it is transforming our lives for better and for worse.

    The current design and function of the web have become so familiar that it is easy to forget that they grew out of programming decisions made decades ago. The web’s first designers made crucial choices (such as making one’s presence anonymous) that have had enormous—and often unintended—consequences. What’s more, these designs quickly became “locked in,” a permanent part of the web’s very structure.

    Lanier discusses the technical and cultural problems that can grow out of poorly considered digital design and warns that our financial markets and sites like Wikipedia, Facebook, and Twitter are elevating the “wisdom” of mobs and computer algorithms over the intelligence and judgment of individuals.

    Lanier also shows:
    How 1960s antigovernment paranoia influenced the design of the online world and enabled trolling and trivialization in online discourse
    How file sharing is killing the artistic middle class;
    How a belief in a technological “rapture” motivates some of the most influential technologists
    Why a new humanistic technology is necessary.

    Controversial and fascinating, You Are Not a Gadget is a deeply felt defense of the individual from an author uniquely qualified to comment on the way technology interacts with our culture.
    ... Read more

    Reviews

    4-0 out of 5 stars A critical take on Web 2.0: People first, January 13, 2010
    "Technology criticism," the author writes, "should not be left to the Luddites." Jaron Lanier is certainly no Luddite, but in this "manifesto" he blasts the Web 2.0 mentality, highlights long-standing technology lock-ins, and ranges far and wide in his criticisms of the Internet, computing, and the cultures surrounding the two today.

    The core of his argument is that the achievements of the Web 2.0 collaborations are neither exciting, nor new. "Let's suppose that, back in the 1980s, I had said, `In a quarter century, when the digital revolution has made great progress and computer chips are millions of times faster than they are now, humanity will finally win the prize of being able to write a new encyclopedia and a new version of UNIX!' It would," he writes, "have sounded utterly pathetic." He's referring to Wikipedia and Linux, two clear successes of collaborative construction. And furthermore, the intellectual work of those thousands of people have been undervalued, in fact, they're unpaid volunteers. The middle classes have spent their hours working without paid to build wonderful constructs for the profits of major companies. Hmmm...as I write this book review, unpaid, with Amazon looking to earn money from selling more copies of this book...

    Ranging further across the Web 2.0 field, Jaron notes the Facebook and Myspace pages in their prescribed formats with individuals reduced to favorite books, movies, five options for politics, and six options for relationship status. Other parts look at technology lock-in, with the example of MIDI. It was developed in the early 1980s for keyboard synthesizer control and output, and reproduces the nuances of a keyboard but not, for example, a violin. It would be hard to get support for a new, broader tool. "A thousand years from now, when a descendant of ours is traveling at relativistic speeds to explore new star systems, she will probably be annoyed by some awful beepy MIDI-driven music to alert her that the antimatter filter needs to be recalibrated."

    Well, I certainly don't agree with everything Jaron has to say, even if I do fondly recall the handmade (with blink tags) web pages from before the AOL deluge (the September without end) when the masses discovered the Internet. There's a lot of crap online, but then again, there's a lot of crap everywhere. I can happily share my family photos over Facebook with people who barely are computer literate, and still be critical of the silly lock-ins of the Facebook pages. Lanier is not a Luddite though, he doesn't want us to smash the digital world, but wants to criticize it to make it better. Nothing wrong with that, whether we agree with his criticism or not.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Thought provoking and worthy of your time., January 15, 2010
    In his book You Are Not a Gadget: A Manifesto, Jaron Lanier becomes a solitary voice in the wilderness shouting as loudly as he can that all is not well with the virtual world nor with the tools that make the virtual world possible....software and computers. That this book was written by an insider from the world of the Internet should get everyone's attention.

    Jaron Lanier is a household name for those who follow the world of computers and virtual reality and his book is nothing more than a manifesto warning us that there is a dark side to the Internet. Even innocuous websites such as Facebook and Google, "lords of the cloud" do not escape Lanier's expose. "Emphasizing the crowd means de-emphasizing individual humans" and that, in the end, leads to "mob" behavior. Utterly true.

    As I flipped through the book, the point that resonated most loudly to me was the impact `anonymity' has had on our virtual world (and maybe the real world as well). I can remember visiting a chat room that was dedicated to "Books and Literature" in 2000 or 2001. As a librarian I was naturally drawn to a space that I thought would be filled with others like me who had a love of the written word and for good books. Did that assumption back fire? You bet! What I found was a chat area filled with virtual people who wanted to chat about anything but books and literature. If I were to post a question about what people were reading or what they thought of a given book I was torn (virtually) from limb to limb. Having served in the military I have a pretty good operational understanding of foul language, and I'm pretty good at throwing the words around when necessary. However, that this language would be used in that particular venue by people who could remain anonymous was a shock. I'm pretty certain that most of the visitors to that website hadn't read a book in years and had no problem violating the most basic rules of civility. Lanier is correct when he argues that this is not a step in the right direction. (Please forgive this personal observation)

    Obviously I'm a fan of the virtual world. I post reviews online for free (which is another point Lanier makes) but the joy isn't the posting of reviews but in reading the books; real books. What Lanier has to say should be of interest to all of us.

    You Are Not a Gadget is written for the ordinary reader with a minimal background in computers. Lanier floats from idea to idea not necessarily fully exploring a point, but instead simply raising an issue and then moving on. Very effective!

    I predict that You Are Not a Gadget is destined to become a cultural icon in the future. We now point to books such as Silent Spring by Rachel Carson and I'm Ok, You're Ok by Dr. Thomas Harris as books that changed society and altered the future. I suspect that You Are Not a Gadget may become that type of sign post.

    I highly recommend.

    Peace always.


    3-0 out of 5 stars You are a fluke of the universe. Take full advantage of it., January 30, 2010
    What Jaron Lanier does is take us up 50,000 feet and allow us to view things with perspective. He says we have been overwhelmed by the unnoticed "lock-in" and simply adjust and reduce ourselves to fit the requirements of online dating, social media, forums, and the software we employ. Web 2.0 is homogenizing humanity, taking us down to the lowest common denominator instead of allowing or encouraging us to bloom in different directions. Everything we now "enjoy" seems to be backward looking - music is sampled and retro, news is criticized mercilessly, but very few are creating it any more, relationships are Tweets...

    It sounds like Lanier recommends friends don't let friends communicate via Facebook - they do it on the phone or in person. But the direction we are taking instead reduces interaction, kills creativity, journalism, music, science....it's not as pretty as predicted.

    These are truly valuable criticisms, and this is an important, if flawed book. Flawed because after a hundred page pounding of logic and evidence, Lanier spends the second hundred pages telling us how wonderful it is to be a scientist and play with humans and cuttlefish. I was particularly annoyed with a gratuitous couple of paragraphs devoted to swearing, which which he says might be connected to parts of the brain controlling orifices and obscenity.

    Well, to my knowledge, swearing is purely cultural, not physiological. In Quebec, the worst swearing is against the Catholic Church, Translated into English "Christ Tabernacle" sounds like something WC Fields said to skirt the censors. But it's the most vile thing you can say in polite conversation in Montreal. On the other hand Motherf----r doesn't translate into French at all. And what's any of this got to do with online reductionism? Zilch - is my point. The last 100 pages is full of such diversions.

    Others have pointed to other sections they disagree with, and they all seem to occur in the last half of the book. But don't let that deter you, as it distracted him. The original message is important. People create. Software does not. Software restricts. Don't leave anonymous contributions. Build a creative website of your own design. Probe deeply and uniquely - beyond Wikipedia. Reflect before you blog.

    Lanier says our humanity and creativity are being put at risk by the miasma foisted on us by the incredible leveling machine of the internet. Instead of becoming exciting, the internet has become boring. Instead of creating new music, it has assassinated the entire industry. Instead of bringing people together, it lets them off the hook. That's worth exploring, and for about 100 pages, Lanier does a grand job of it.

    5-0 out of 5 stars one of the best books in a long while, January 15, 2010
    This is a very interesting book. Its a critique of the "internet culture" which has up until now been mostly beyond challenge. The author hits exactly on the key problems of the culture: Collectivism, mob mentality, conformity and the marginalization of the individual. He also hits upon the problem that small decisions made by individuals can lock people into mindsets or patterns of behavior.

    Its an excellent book in highlighting the problems of the era. But it doesn't really provide any easy answers about how to change things. And the unfortunate truth is that many of the problems are less to do with technology than human nature.

    The joke of "free" software is that it isn't "free" at all. It always comes with a licence agreement which spells out that duties of the individual to the "collective". The innovation of Linux and its licence over the works that had preceeded it was that any additions to Linux belonged to the collective. An individual can't ever own anything.

    Wikipedia is even worse. Want to create your own facts or history? Create a web-page where you say something about a particular subject, then quote the webpage as the source for what you want to say on Wikipedia. Suddenly your web page is the equal of any scholarship in the whole of human history.

    In pointing to the growth of mob mentality across society and the accompanying anti-intellectual climate, the author has hit upon *the* key philosophical issue in the new century. This is important and necessary book that deserves to be read.

    =====

    While my review remains positive, I want to point out one major problem in the book. The account of events on p. 125-126 is full of misinformation and errors. The LISP machine in retrospect was a horrible idea. It died because the RISC and MIPS CPU efforts on the west coast were a much better idea. Putting high-level software (LISP) into electronics was a bad idea.

    Stallman's disfunctional relationship with Symbolics is badly misrepresented. Stallman's licence was not the first or only free software licence. Where stallman was unique was in that his licenses are more about enforcing the rights of the collective and claiming the work of others than anything to do with making things free. And often the growth of the so-called culture was being driven by personal feuds with the BSD community, with Symbolics and with anyone who dared touch the holy EMACS editor. Much of the time, the so-called movement seemed more about picking fights and asserting control than anything to do with makings things free.

    And the irony of Linus Torvalds is that he didn't follow in their footsteps. Stallman and company were driven by flawed collectivism into a massive failed project known as "Hurd". Linus was successful in that he brought an individualist mindset, a simple set of ideas and the ability to get along with other people to his effort. Linux isn't that way anymore, but the reasons that Linux (with no reasources) was successful and the Hurd (with huge resources) was a massive failure presents a case study in how collectivism fails.

    There have been any number of massive collectivist failures. To list a few: The OSI networking protocols, the ADA programming language, The first generation of microkernel operating systems, OSF/1 (and the OSF in general), any number of initiatives at the IETF.... Things that have tended to be successful over time are things that grew up in secret.

    And calling Linux an "antique" was really strange as is the idea that it represents a 1970s mindset. The fact is that all kinds of people have tried new radical designs for operating systems since the 1980s and they have all generally been dismal failures (like Hurd from GNU). And the fact is, many people who worked on such things discovered over time that investing creativity at the lower levels of the system was generally a bad idea. Abstract entities were best created at the higher levels of systems where hardware and operating system would stay out of the way as much as possible.

    5-0 out of 5 stars A brilliant work of Pragmatic "Techno-Philosophy", January 27, 2010
    I had never heard of Jaron Lanier before reading this book; I bought it for one reason only - a blurb on the back cover by Lee Smolin (The Life of the Cosmos) - and I am so glad I did.

    Essentially, Lanier has written a well founded criticism of the uses and abuses of technology in the world today. One of the main culprits in Lanier's view is the metaphor that people are computers and that we can ultimately reduce descriptions of both humans and computers to simple processes of information exchange. Lanier rightly believes this metaphor is inherently damaging to peoples psyche's and to society in general - this is a view I share with Lanier. Some of his targets include the "computationalism" philosophers like Daniel Dennett and Douglas Hofstadter; "eliminative materialists" like Patricia and Paul Churchland; biologically heavy-handed academics like Richard Dawkins and Christof Koch; and the over-the-top Singularity preachers like Ray Kurzweil (The Singularity Is Near: When Humans Transcend Biology) and Vernor Vinge (Rainbows End). There is much missing from these people's reductionist approach - People Are Not Computers (hence the title: You Are Not a Gadget). I praise Lanier for his sensible, pragmatic and inspiring manifesto on this issue and his call for a more humanistic approach. He must really feel like the lone voice in the wilderness.

    Throughout Lanier's work, I couldn't help but be reminded of the general ennui that seems to be sweeping through our culture these days. Lanier has captured the universal angst that some of my other favorite books speak about too (Empire of Illusion: The End of Literacy and the Triumph of Spectacle, Idiot America: How Stupidity Became a Virtue in the Land of the Free, Denialism: How Irrational Thinking Hinders Scientific Progress, Harms the Planet, and Threatens Our Lives, Bright-sided: How the Relentless Promotion of Positive Thinking Has Undermined America and The Trap: Selling Out to Stay Afloat in Winner-Take-All America). I am definitely adding it to this small collection of books as a reminder to myself to break free from the historical "lock-in" that seems to come as technological niches get filled (think Google, Facebook, Amazon (which I do love), iTunes, MS Windows, et al)) Try something new Lanier says. Don't simply rely on the Matthew effect, Cumulative Advantage, or what Michael Shermer calls the Bestseller Effect: "It takes only a tiny group of engineers to create technology that can shape the entire future of human experience with incredible speed. Therefore, crucial arguments about the human relationship with technology should take place between developers and users before such direct manipulations are designed. This book is about those arguments."

    Some cool new terminology I learned: open-culture, cloud, hive-mind, noosphere, and lulz. I love this book and highly recommend it. Thanks Lee Smolin!

    5-0 out of 5 stars The Coming Down of Great Expectations, February 26, 2010
    The first thing that must be said about Jaron Lanier's "You Are Not a Gadget: A Manifesto" is that it a very intricate book, full of several different arguments and lines of thought. It might be best to say that it is a manifesto containing several submanifestos. His arguments against the current directions in "web 2.0" technology are many and multifaceted, taking us through questions of the effectiveness of capitalism, how culture evolves, whether there can really be "wisdom in crowds," and even the nature of what "human" is.

    If we have to sum up the book into an overall point or argument, here's how I'd do it: web technology, which was hoped to lead to vigorous innovation and individualization, has done precisely the opposite. On the consumption side, the idea of the "wisdom of crowds" has made the group (Lanier says "hive mind") more important and more "real" than voices of individuals. On the production side, the internet has led less to innovative production than to the recycling of old ideas in new forms, while making it hard for inventors/pioneers to make a living being creative. (Yes, I know I am missing some things in this description but, as mentioned, Lanier's work is very hard to sum up with concision.)

    Lanier believes that there are two big reasons for this. First, we are not using our conception of humanity to drive how we shape technology so much as we are allowing technology to shape how we define humanity. A shining example is our faith in the "wisdom of crowds" as exemplified by our increasing obsession with all things wiki. Lanier reminds us that, in reality, there is no such "wisdom in crowds" because crowds are simply collections of individuals making individual decisions. (I would also add that "wisdom of crowds" is a literal impossibility as wisdom can only happen embodied in a point-of-view, of which a crowd has none.)

    Secondly, Lanier believes that innovation may be lagging behind expectations because of our belief in the "information wants to be free" model. Yes, this has benefits, like offering information in a way that is accessible to...well...most. But it has the disadvantage of removing the incentives provided by markets out of a market. Lanier often uses the example of music and art: it was thought that the internet would allow more artists to make livings off of their art by removing the middle-men and allowing artists direct access to consumers. But with so much free content and exponentially increased competition, it is becoming even harder for artists to (a) get noticed in the milieu and (b) make a living off of their creativity.

    While Lanier does not directly champion capitalism (he does contemplate its goods and bads), I think it is fair to argue that Lanier is championing a market system as the surest spur to innovation. Here, I must quote him directly: ""Why are so many of the more sophisticated examples of code in the online world - like the page-rank algorithm in the top search engines or like Adobe's Flash - the results of proprietary development? Why did the adored iphone come out of what many regarded as the most closed, tyrannically managed software - development shop on earth? An honest empiricist must conclude that while the open approach has been able to create lovely, polished copies, it hasn't been so good at creating notable originals." Lanier is not against the open source movement (think Youtube) altogether, but does present good pragmatic arguments as to why it is severely limited.

    In a book so rich and varied, I certainly can't say I agree with everything Lanier puts forth. One of the major criticisms I have of the book is that while Lanier sees the internet's failure to meet expectations as a problem with the internet, he never blames the expectations. By example, Lanier bemoans the fact that much music created in the past 15 years (with technology) hasn't been wholly innovative, as he thought it would be. But I would remind him that such whole-cloth innovation has always been rare. Jazz, he says, was innovative, as were the Bealtes experiments with multi-track recording. Why nothing like that now? Well, Jazz used the same musical forms and concepts of Dixieland before it and ragtime before that. And the Beatles multitrack experiments didn't sound THAT different from the rock and roll which preceded it. Similarly, Lanier bemoans the fact that Wikipedia is simply the combination of the existing ideas of the encyclopedia and usenet. Okay, but couldn't it just be that the encyclopedia and usenet were such good ideas, that combining them is better than scrapping them and inventing from whole-cloth? Long and short, Lanier expected the type of whole-cloth invention out of the internet that never really existed before the internet.

    There are several other areas where I think Lanier's arguments are weak (and several places where I think he argues against "straw man" positions held by only a few). I will not get into them as this isn't the place. What I will say is that I cannot recommend this book strongly enough. Even though I am sure everyone will find areas of agreement AND disagreement with Lanier, every reader will think very deeply as a result of what he writes. He is neither a luddite nor a techno-utopian, neither a reductionist or a mysterian, and neither a techno-anarchist or techno-Maoist. But he is a challenging thinker who deserves to be thought about.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Finally someone wrote this book!, February 8, 2010
    There have been several book-length arguments about how the Internet has degraded content, culture, and creativity. Previous books in this vein have included Clifford Stoll's Silicon Snake Oil, Mark Helprin's Digital Barbarism, and Andrew Keen's The Cult of the Amateur. The first two of these are unreadable, and Keen's book is undone by his snarky tone.

    Jaron Lanier's You Are Not a Gadget is not only far better than any of these but is also the only one that offers cogent explanations for why the Internet is the way it is, not just opinionated rants. He explains how technological design decisions made 30-40 years ago led to aspects of the Internet that are undesirable, such as repressions of positive human qualities such as individual creativity, industriousness, and responsibility.

    He also shows how Internet content business models benefit no one except so-called "lords of the cloud" such as Google and Facebook; moreover, they lead to devaluation of content from both cultural and economic perspectives. He tackles the emerging "Music 2.0" business models that Internet polyannas/apologists expect to thrive in the new age and debunks them one by one.

    Some of the theoretical and philosophical arguments Lanier makes in this book are hard to follow (the philosophy stuff in Part 1) or seem far-fetched (the discussions of cephalopods towards the end). But I view them as part of his effort to create a serious framework to back up his assertions.

    This book needs to achieve the same level of notoriety as the Cluetrain Manifesto of ten years ago. It's just as important.

    4-0 out of 5 stars On You are not a Gadget, April 7, 2010
    In You are not a Gadget Jaron Lanier purposes that the emergence of web 2.0, cloud computing, and the "hive mind" of humanity are beginning to stifle creativity, individualism, and expression in the human race. He believes a paradigm shift has occurred (and is rapidly continuing to occur) in the last two decades that is reducing our fundamental human-ness. I find his ideas fascinating.

    The book starts out speaking about the limitations inherent in our current technology due to lock-in as many of the programming languages currently in use today were written ten, twenty, thirty years ago. A good example is MIDI. MIDI was created to be a simple mime of a synthesizer on a computer, but MIDI only specifies certain notes in a limited range (like the keys on a piano). Pick up a saxophone or start to sing and there are many more possible sounds than can be produced using MIDI; the technology is so embedded in everything we do now that it's locked-in.

    Lainer stands in contrast to proponents of the free/open culture movement; most free culture advocates perceive themselves as rebellious and liberal but Lainer posits that they are the conservative ones. He makes a great point in that many of our best pieces of software have come from closed systems - i.e. the iPhone or Adobe Flash. This quote sums up his view nicely: "If we choose to pry culture away from capitalism while the rest of life is still capitalistic, culture will become a slum." I think a happy medium does exist, but is currently not present in efforts such as Creative Commons licensing (though it's certainly a start).

    "Am I accusing all of those hundreds of millions of users of social networking sites of reducing themselves in order to be able to use the services? Well yes, I am. [...] A real friendship outght to introduce each person to unexpected weirdness in the other. Each acquaintance is an alien, a well of unexplored difference in the experience of life that cannot be imagined or accessed in any way but through genuine interaction. The idea of friendship in database-filtered social networks is certainly reduced from that." Sure all of that is true, but that all depends on how we define and value various words. I don't consider all of my 1,192 "Facebook friends" to be my close friends in real life, many are people that I've met along the way and simply want to keep in touch with occasionally. I realized shortly after reading that chapter that I was being small. I grew up straddling the analog and digital ages and I know both. Lanier is looking beyond that at future generations that will grow up on Facebook, Twitter, and other web 2.0 networks.

    I've found great joy in people I've met on the internet and proceeded to meet in person, many of who have become great friends. I've been meeting people from online communities for nearly a decade now and it's never been weird or creepy, aside from the middle school dance feeling that might occur for the first few minutes. To be fair, Lainer does spend about a page or two praising this result of the web, but I don't think he gives it enough credit.

    One point I have to strongly disagree with is Lanier's assertion that musical progress has been greatly slowed and everything is just "retro, retro, retro." He says most people in their 20s can't differentiate between 90s and 00s music. Can you tell me that there's anything that sounds like The Postal Service or The Knife from the 20th century? Those are just two examples off the top of my head but there's a plethora of original music out there right now that is distinct to our time. I'm also not sure why musical genres and trends have to be spliced into ten year increments that coincide neatly with decades, but that's just an aside. Musical genres have splintered and there's isn't currently an overarching archetype, but I would say that's simply because we have access to so much music and record companies no longer have as much power to set the standard for what is appropriate for the masses. The masses decide for themselves by finding new music on the internet.

    I found this book to be a fantastic thought exercise and it made me take a hard look at my technological worldview. I wish the conclusion was a more coherent and non-tangential; Lanier goes on to talk about cephlopods for several pages at the end of the book.

    My life is seeped in web 2.0; this review itself is sending to four different web 2.0 platforms after I hit the publish button. We as a culture and society have become so engrossed in these platforms that I think it's important to step back and evaluate exactly what it is we're doing. I hope there's a compromise that exists between totally free and open culture and closed systems; I suppose we'll find out.

    4-0 out of 5 stars We're Not Gadgets Yet, But...., February 6, 2010
    This is the sort of book I normally avoid, a compilation of jargon filled columns and short bits written for other outlets mashed into a book. But here's the thing, if you haven't read Lanier's work before, you should give this book a look, if only for this thought provoking quote on Facebook: "The real customer is the advertiser of the future, but this creature has yet to appear at the time this is being written. The whole artifice, the whole idea of fake friendship, is just bait laid by the lords of the clouds to lure hypothetical advertisers--we might call them messianic advertisers--who might someday show up." So much of the Digital Age is built around making money on things we once never associated with the material world, things like friendship (Facebook, My Space) and love (eHarmony), sex (so many porn sites). In some ways, the internet is one big advertising medium, and it's come to control so much of our world, influence our decisions, and to dominate our lives. And as someone who works with his hands, I worry a lot about "free content" and the devaluing of craft. This book grapples with that, and a lot more. Recommended for anyone who thinks deeply on these matters, or who wonders where the digital world is leading us, and how we can set a new path.

    4-0 out of 5 stars Slightly naive but nevertheless insightful, March 15, 2010
    Lanier certainly has a different vibe than most famous technologists. Since late 1980s he was warning us that the cult of databases would lead us to a limited notion of personhood, that through binary choices we will start to think about ourselves in a more mechanized way. This makes his line of thought close to that of Sherry Turkle and -if we dig deeper - with the foucauldian concept of grids of specifications and grand narrations. Very insightful and profound thinking, a valid critique of all things Web 2.0.

    Alas, Lanier is hardly an accomplished scholar in the field of social sciences - he is a technologist and an artist but neither a sociologist or psychologist. As such, he lacks the perspective which could help him see how his own rant assumes a certain vision of personhood and human 'nature' which came to being with the rise of Western individualism - not more than 100-150 years ago. While Lanier's voice is valuable as one of the very few enlightened luddites, he still fails to join a broader discourse about changing frameworks of human knowledge and self-identification.

    Won't mention some looney ideas like songles or cephalopods. Only the 1st part of the book is readable. ... Read more


    20. The Post-American World
    by Fareed Zakaria
    Paperback
    list price: $15.95 -- our price: $10.35
    (price subject to change: see help)
    Isbn: 0393334805
    Publisher: W. W. Norton & Company
    Sales Rank: 2825
    Average Customer Review: 4.2 out of 5 stars
    US | Canada | United Kingdom | Germany | France | Japan

    Editorial Review

    “Zakaria . . . may have more intellectual range and insights than any other public thinkerin the West.” —Boston SundayGlobe“This is not a book about the decline of America, but rather about the rise of everyone else.” Sobegins Fareed Zakaria’s blockbusting bestselleron the United States in the twenty-firstcentury. How can Americans understand thisrapidly changing international climate, and howmight the nation continue to thrive in a trulyglobal era? Zakaria answers these questions with his customary lucidity, insight, andimagination.

    ... Read more

    Reviews

    5-0 out of 5 stars Where We Are Today and Where We Go From Here, April 28, 2008
    Mr. Zakaria has written a short primer (250+ pages of text) about where the world is today and the role he sees the United States playing in the future. His assessment, for the most part, is fair, balanced and nonpartisan. And though the title of his treatise--The Post-American World--sounds pessimistic, in reality Mr. Zakaria sees the glass half full.

    The principal weakness of the book is a product of its brevity: the author paints in broad strokes, providing a sweeping assessment of the dynamic changes that have unfolded on the world scene over the past twenty-five years. This invariably results in some over-generalizations and assessments that are not sufficiently nuanced. For example, in responding to concerns about China's growing power and influence, he quotes several Chinese officials who repeatedly reassure the listener that, notwithstanding its recent advances, China still lags behind the United States in so many areas; consequently, it poses no real threat to America or its neighbors. Instead of taking these sentiments at face value, Mr. Zakaria should remember, as Margaret Macmillan astutely noted in her recent book, "Nixon and Mao: The Week That Changed the World," that the Chinese are the past masters at using self-effacement to lure their adversaries into a state of complacency.

    The greatest strengths of the book are explaining to the reader how much the world has changed over the past 25 years (did you know that China now exports more goods and services in a single day than it did in all of 1978?), while illuminating the course corrections the United States needs to make so that it can continue to influence the evolution of globalization. I was surprised to discover that the simple truths taught by Adam Smith have lifted more people above the poverty line in the last 25 years (400 million in China alone) than all the government assistance programs of all the countries in the world since the beginning of time. But I was dismayed to learn that the polices of free trade, liberal immigration, technological change and open government that are the source of this global revolution are no longer warmly received in the United States. Mr. Zakaria notes that in 2007 the Pew Global Attitudes Survey polled citizens in 47 countries for purposes of measuring the extent to which they have positive views about free trade and open markets. Guess where the U.S. came in? Dead last. Mr. Zakaria observes that in the five years the survey has been done, no country has seen as great a drop-off as the United States. It's as if, he says, that for the past sixty years we have extolled the virtues of free markets, immigration, technological change, competition, and democracy, and now that the rest of the world has finally decided to take our advice, "we are becoming suspicious of the very things we have long celebrated." (p. 48).

    If you want to look in the mirror and see the warts and disappointments, along with the beauty and promise, of America, read this book. You and our country will be better for it.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Even better than his last book, April 30, 2008
    A lot of books have been appearing recently about the rise of China and India, the decline of the United States, and so forth. This is the one to read, and the one that will last.

    Zakaria's last book was about "The Future of Freedom," a study of liberalism and democracy. This new one--which is even better, I think--is about the shape of the emerging international system. It's called "The Post-American World," but a better title would have been the one he gives his first chapter, "The Rise of the Rest." That's because Zakaria's central thesis is that the world is changing, but the change is largely for the better and caused by the benign development of other power centers, not some collapse or decline of the United States. The biggest challenge for America, he argues, is not terrorism or nuclear proliferation or a rising China, but rather our own ability to adapt successfully to the new environment. He favors confidence and openness rather than insecurity and barriers, and makes a convincing case.

    The book has chapters on each of the major international players, and they're really well done: amazingly, he manages to paint a full portrait of, say, China or India that is intelligent, succinct, subtle, and comprehensive all at once. If you want to get a flavor of what the book has to offer, there's an article based on it in the new issue of Foreign Affairs, and there should be another one coming out in Newsweek too, apparently. The man might be a superachieving bigshot, but he sure can write--each page is lively and interesting.

    So forget the angry neocons, the wild-eyed optimists, the gloom-and-doom pessimists, and the glib amateurs who don't really know anything. Read this instead, and get insight into what's actually going in the world and what should be done about it. Plus, there's just a ton of fun little nuggets you'll be itching to drop in every conversation you have about anything related.

    2-0 out of 5 stars Read the article in Foreign Affairs, and skip the book., June 24, 2008
    His conclusion is that the rest is rising relative to the US. Well, this has been happening more or less since WWII. So the whole argument is not original to start with.

    Similar to S. Huntington, he refers to "West" as Western Europe and the US. Such definition is flawed, and even S. Hutingon revised his to include southern regions in Latin America and Eastern European nations.

    His analysis of Asia has some merit, but some of his statements come accross as very naive. For instance at one point he mentions "Samba is booming in Latin America". What is that supposed to mean?

    Overall, it looks like Fareed the journalist has buried Fareed the scholar, at the cost of sounding superficial and naive. That makes it very hard to get to the end of the book.

    Having read his article on the same subject on Foreign Affairs, which I thought was very good, I was very dissapointed with this book.

    So I recommend read the article, and skip the book.

    5-0 out of 5 stars The Return to a Multipolar World, May 14, 2008
    Fareed Zakaria writes that three great global power shifts have occurred in the last 500 years: the first was the rise of the West with its advances in science, technology, and commerce; the second was the rise of the US, to superpower status after World War II and to hyperpower status after the Cold War; and the third - the one we are currently experiencing - is the "rise of the rest." The global dominance that the US has enjoyed is rapidly coming to an end, not because of its own missteps - there were many - but because of the extraordinary economic growth in countries such as China, India, Russia, and Brazil. Except for a few pockets of poverty, globalization has been largely successful.

    The Post-American World points to the need for America to adopt new ways of doing business with the world, one that is based on "consultation, cooperation, and even compromise" as opposed to go-it-alone unilateralism. American success in the 21st century will depend on how these newly ascendant powers will be integrated into existing institutions such as the G8, the IMF, the World Bank, and the WTO. Even though some of these countries do not meet Western liberal democratic standards they should not be shut out as Robert Kagan suggested in The Return of History and the End of Dreams.

    Integrating autocracies such as China, Russia, and the Central Asian republics in the international liberal order will be one of the greatest challenges in international relations in the years ahead. After all, autocracies have been very successful, producing 7-10% annual growth rates. They produce great investment opportunities for foreigners. And their foreign policy of non-interference with the sovereignty of other countries has made them welcome almost everywhere. This purely pragmatic approach, although successful in economics, has many shortcomings in the political realm. Zakaria believes that although they have been successful and even popular, it is important for Western democracies to have solidarity to prevent further backsliding.

    Economic growth is only one of the components that keep autocracies in power, another is nationalism. One need only look at the popularity of Putin when he defies the West or China's reaction everytime they feel slighted by foreigners. Nationalism will rise as economic fortunes rise. Zakaria, who is always reasonable and optimistic in his views, believes that nations will be reasonable too. He believes that the newly ascendant powers will not be aggressive militarily if they are embedded in the current system. China, for example, does not need to invade neighboring countries when it can buy whatever it needs. For the time being this is working, but what happens "the rest" become much more powerful and resources become even more scarce? Will the the international order hold or will nationalist impulses rule the day? Zakaria is optimistic, but he still believes that the US will have an indispensible roll in keeping this system in place.

    3-0 out of 5 stars OK, BUT..., July 30, 2008
    The author makes the case that the world of the 21st century will be multipolar, with the U.S. not declining in absolute but in relative terms. Zakaria documents his opinions well and makes for good reading. However, I remained unconvinced of two of his assertions: one, that India will be one of the global powers of this century, based on niceties such as its democratic system and the imagined fascination about all things Indian that he attributes to Americans; judging by the evidence stemming from overwhelming poverty, India's inclusion in Zakaria's wishful list may be the product of his upbringing in that country rather than cold facts. The other missing point is his almost total exclusion of the European Union as one of the world's powerhouses of the near future. Particularly when considering Europe's output, social indicators and expansion to the East and the rest of the globe, making almost no mention of the importance of the EU in the world to come seems as glaring a flaw as the absence of evidence to support his forecasts about India. We may not have to wait 100 years to confirm it.

    4-0 out of 5 stars This World Has Already Arrived, July 17, 2008
    First and foremost, there is an elephant in the room.

    Fareed Zakaria is a member of the PNAC: Project for the New American Century. The PNAC advocates using the US military to overthrow foreign governments to enforce American economic interests around the globe, no matter how negative the consequences. The PNAC advocates this foreign policy because there is no check on the United States after the collapse of the USSR. After the PNAC-Iraq campaign didn't turn out to be as cheap and easy as the PNAC and Zakaria thought it would be, Zakaria "changed" his opinion. How interesting; how convenient. A journalistic version of the Peter Principle. This author's PNAC membership is relevant to his latest book.

    In "the Post-American World" Zakaria reinforces his points by noting globalization and changes 500 years ago, historically and adequately linking the past with our truly globalized civilization of today. In the latter 18th Century America rose steadily. The Spanish-American war brought territory far off the the shore of the US. After WWII, the US emerged as one of two superpowers, and after the fall of the Soviet Union, became what the author calls, a "hyperpower." This hyperpower status is when many nation-states do what nation-states historically do: get greedy, become selfish, and over-reach diplomatically, economically, and militarily.

    To echo other readers, yes this book is optimistic. Why wouldn't it be? The focus is on the global economy and emerging markets, basically. Zakaria claims American influence isn't declining, but that the rest of the world is rising. Where is the evidence that the US is not declining? The evidence of US decline is everywhere, domestically and internationally.

    The Post-American world noticeably started emerging in the early 1990s and it's obvious across the globe now. Zakaria accurately focuses on the past 25 years, citing many facts. In my opinion, not only is the rest of the world ascending *economically* (China, India, Brazil, Vietnam, and others) but the US is in a state of slow and steady decline. This is historically normal, and natural. Over the the course of history, all superpowers grow, peak, and then decline. This is not negative. It's the evolution of the nation-state. Just like people. We're born, we grow, we age, and we die. The Roman empire declined over the course of 300 years. The USA is diminishing much faster.

    It's not surprising that Americans in the Global Pew survey recorded the lowest of all countries in their opinions about globalization and "free trade" according to Zakaria. Yet, this has been the official policy of the US government for several decades.

    With the current economic ascension of several nations, do international organizations accurately represent the current world population and economic strength of the world? Look at the G8: why is Canada in the G8 and Brazil, not? Why are France and Italy members? As for outsourcing, is outsourcing jobs all positive, having no negative ramifications at all? Is chasing the cheapest labor the success of "globalization?" Is opening the door for immigration not only for menial low-paying jobs, but highly skilled ones via the H1-B visa, success of our international global economy in the USA?

    Only a couple of complaints about this book: author Zakaria is stating things anyone who follows current events already knows. Many of the global economic facts, especially pertaining to China and India, are already common knowledge. The author could have dug deeper. This book was also very short. Perhaps this book was aimed at readers who don't pay attention to international affairs. "The Post-American World" is for neophytes, and that's OK. Any information, with accurate research, is worthy information. Whatever the author's objectives, the book did reach some of a American public that casually watches the conglomerate American mainstream media, as there were discussions about this book when it was released.

    The more Americans become aware, the more frugal, more humble, and less nationalistic they may become.

    5-0 out of 5 stars Brave New World., August 31, 2009
    I arrived in the city pictured on the cover of this book -- Hong Kong -- two years after Zakaria came to the United States. Watching Asia change, year after year -- I spoke at several churches in Hong Kong this summer, and the skyscrapers of Central spread out before the window of my hotel room are now the most impressive on earth -- Zakaria puts into words, and hard statistics, realities that I have been pondering for many years now.

    In 1984, I remember watching people in a small town outside Hong Kong snapping together little pieces of plastic to make Christmas toys. It's hard to imagine seeing that sort of poverty there today. Education, hard work, the export of technology, and free enterprise have brought increasing prosperity to countries around the world, as Zakaria shows. He does a wonderful job of melding stats, telling facts, quotes from statesmen, to present a case for a reality that Americans need to get used to: there will be no "second American century." The United States will be one of several great powers within a few short years.

    I don't much agree with Zakaria's politics. He's a moderate democrat, I'm a conservative Republican. To me, the greatest American blunder is not anything George Bush did overseas, but the suicidal binge spending the Bush, and especially Obama, administrations have engaged in. But nothing we can do could have stopped the laws of mathematics anyway, and as free trade and the spread of techonology evens out per capita production, "we must decrease (relatively) and they must increase."

    I think if anything, Zakaria underestimates the extent of that change. Within a few years, China will be the world's richest superpower in GDP. (As I predicted 25 years ago.) Our vast borrowing from the Chinese has probably excelerated the transition. With 4-5 times our population, in a generation we will be roughly to China what the UK is to us, and India will surpass the US as well.

    Zakaria is right to look at the last time such a transition occurred, from the UK, to put this in context, but wrong in some of the conclusions he draws. It is unreasonable to blame the moralizing of British evangelicals for weakening British power, for example. Was Britain weaker because it banned the slave trade and began to educate Indians instead of merely exploit them? Such policies were largely responsible for the "soft power" Zakaria admires, and did not cause Britain's relative decline.

    What Zakaria says on page 109 about East Asian religious beliefs is also misleading, IMO. (See David Aikman's Jesus in Beijing for a more reasonable discussion, or my True Son of Heaven.) Strangely, Zakaria expresses surprise that 72% of Chinese deny that one must believe in God to be moral. Doesn't he know that young Chinese have been educated by communists, who are atheists, for the past 60 years? What's remarkable is that it's only 72 % -- the real story is the renewel of and spread of religion in China, including Christianity -- and what Zakaria says about Confucianism is mostly nonsense. (The Chinese don't even call it that -- they call it the "teaching of the scholars," so Zakaria's point about Confucius not believing in God is moot -- besides, Confucius did believe in God, and the writers of the Classics he edited, and that were the basis for "Confucianism," really are rather theistic -- I've been pouring over them for the past few months.)

    But Zakaria gets the big picture mostly right. He demonstrates that we are in a transition phase, entering not into a world in which America is irrelevant, but in which America is just one great power of many. On the off chance that the greatest of those new powers behaves itself (one can dream), perhaps we Americans can go back to minding our own business again pretty soon. (And start paying back all that massive debt our foolish politians have accumulated.)

    2-0 out of 5 stars Reads like a magazine article, July 18, 2008
    The book reads much like magazine articles from Newsweek or such. This can be seen as a compliment for some, but it was a disappointing read for me.

    The chosen topic of discussion is magnificent, but this book does little more than string together international trivia and point to glossy analogies to the rise of America and fall of Britain. Even though Mr. Zakaria's thesis is not new, a good-faith effort requires more substantiation. The book invariably assumes what it should set out to show (eg, Britain was insular and 'Bismarck' was engaging; America should be like 'Bismarck') and brushes off the inconvenient (eg, average American students score lower than most industrialized countries, but well scoring Americans rank competitively). Mr. Zakaria also distances himself from neoconservative policies and points out that America's marginalization was inevitable.

    Although this issue is becoming ever more pressing, 'The Post-American World' doesn't do justice to the topic. People better versed in history or seeking more substance should look elsewhere. On the other hand, it's a glossy read with catchy phrases for the faithful.

    1-0 out of 5 stars The Future from an Articulate Globalist, August 7, 2008
    I purchased this book in large part based on the good and bad reviews, deciding to see what the author had to say. Unfortunately, my money was poorly spent as I could not get beyond the first 48 pages (at first, although I subsequently read the entire book) due to the many "duh" statements, banalities, poor historical analysis, and an evinced lack of knowledge concerning the American people, our history, and our culture. Even though the book was supposed to be not about the fall of the US but the rise of the others, the author needed to possess more knowledge of America than he showed.

    As so often among young people the author makes liberal use of adjectives such as "great" and many words ending in "est" to prove that he is living in history's greatest and most important age. Yes, China and India possess 2.5 billion people and the US only 300 million. Since population is power, and with all other things being more or less equal, world leadership will pass to those nations. Hardly a seminal conclusion. In addition, the US is likely to fracture into five countries before half of the twentieth-first century has passed, and jingoistic statements by Americans today will seem foolish in retrospect. But the author doesn't know enough US history to understand that.

    I was put off by the author flights of fancy as early as page 2. Here he states; "Soon after it became industrialized, the United States became the most powerful nation since imperial Rome...", this supposedly taking place in the closing years of the nineteenth century. I know of no serious historian who would make such a claim. On page 17 the author states; "If this is 1938, as many conservatives argue, then Iran is Romania, not Germany." Gee, in 1938, Romania possessed a larger army than the US, but was still subject to domination by its larger neighbors. The King still ruled, and the Iron Guard and Antonescu did not assume power until 1940. And in 1940 Romania was forced to give up Bessarabia and Northern Bukovina to the Soviet Union, much of Transylvania to Hungary, and southern Dobruja to Bulgaria. Where's the parallel other than to propagandize?

    On page 33 the author states; "Nationalism has always perplexed Americans." Wow! Only if Zakaria limits his Americans to his globalist elite friends in New York and Washington can this statement have any validity. This entire paragraph on page 33 is a figment of the author's uninformed imagination. But the end came on page 34, when Zakaria simply insulted the intelligence of Americans. "Given mainstream US historical accounts from Stephen Ambrose to Ken Burns, Americans could be forgiven for believing that Russia played a minor part in the decisive battles against Hitler and Tojo." I agree that Ambrose writes popular and fluffy books and that Burns is by no stretch of the imagination an historian, but obviously Zakaria has met few Americans in the hinterland. My first book on WWII was "Life's Picture History Of World War II" that my parents gave me in 1951, but my second was Walter Goerlitz's "The History Of The German General Staff" in 1954, and the third was "Lost Victories (Verlorene Siege) by Erich von Manstein in 1958. But no mind, for Zakaria, all Americans other than his cherished globalists are ignorant.

    Yes, the US is training more scientists, engineers and PhDs in its elite universities who are foreigners than native Americans. A white American lad from the hinterland who achieves a maximum on his SATS, is valedictorian of a graduating class of 700, letters in golf, and wins many honors in high school, has absolutely no chance of being accepted at Harvard, Princeton, Yale or Stanford unless he clearly states he wants to become a leader in global politics or economics. But that's not the fault of Middle America or the stock that brought the US to its short period of global dominance. Nor will that change until the US partitions into multiple countries since our elites are busy selling us out for their own profit and greater grandeur.

    Interestingly enough, Zakaria seems to cheerlead the rise of nationalism in Third-World countries, but nationalism in the US is deplored as xenophobia. The US must sacrifice itself on the alter of the one world order. No doubt when the time comes, Zakaria will return to his native country to live in unrivaled splendor. For the Americans left behind who were ridden hard and put away wet, there will be no place to go.

    All this drove me to perform some research on Zakaria, an individual about whom I knew little. I found he is an Indian Muslim who grew up in India in substantial wealth and attended a private British school. He was accepted at Yale (of course) then, not having to worry about supporting himself, earned a PhD at Harvard under professors Huntington and Hoffman, interesting characters in their own rights. He rose rapidly after 9-11 as a supposedly moderate Muslin voice among the US media and is now editor of the ultra-left Newsweek International. His globalist credentials are impeccable by his being on the board of Yale, the Trilateral Commission, the Council On Foreign Relations, and Columbia University's International House. The only thing missing is being a member of the Bilderbergs, but my sources on the Bilderbergs only went to 2002, and no doubt he is a member now.

    In short, the author is one of the legion of foreigners who have come to the US for various reasons since WWII (George Soros comes to mind) and are working to move the US into globalism and their concept of a one world order. Having gained that intelligence, there was no reason to subject myself further to propaganda of this type. If you have not previously grasped the motives behind such clever propaganda, you might read this example. It is easy to read and short, but don't allow yourself to be denigrated and used for cannon fodder. And if my references to the Trilateral Commission, The Council On Foreign Relations or the Bilderbergs are unknown to you, it's past time for you to do some research on these organizations and their impact or control of world trends and events.

    2-0 out of 5 stars Friedman with a hint of Huntington, May 8, 2008
    Zakaria is a great writer whose produced a highly readable book. Its impossible to go through the pages without feeling a great surge of hope for what the future isabout to bring, courtesy the miracle of free markets. Liberally annotated with anecdotes.

    The problem is that at the heart of it, this is just more of the Thomas Friedman "Lexus and Olive Tree" rising-tide-lifts-all-boats theory with the same prescriptions so beloved by bipartisan Washington since 1988: more trade, more immigration, more outsourcing.

    Zakaria's picture omits big pieces of the puzzle: devastated rural America, the loss of those jobs with nothing to replace them: what IS the unemployed American worker supposed to train for? And just who is going to buy all the products that corporations are producing so cheaply in India in China?

    And what happens when those stellar immigrants (like Zakaria), or more likely, their children, become disaffected Americans and make up the "bitter" folks who live in ghettos - urban or rural - like dying Appalachian towns or the immigrant high rise projects of Bradford or Marseille?

    Zakaria does try to factor in nationalism, but ignores the human implications of people who are going to lose in his Brave New World. And ultimately, his prescriptions, however entertaining and promising, are ultimately just more of the NYT/WSJ op-ed page.
    ... Read more


    1-20 of 100       1   2   3   4   5   Next 20
    Prices listed on this site are subject to change without notice.
    Questions on ordering or shipping? click here for help.

    Top